Fujitsu PRIMERGY RX200 S7 Manual
Hirdetés
Hirdetés
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual - English
PRIMERGY RX200 S7
Server
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual
Edition October 2013
Comments… Suggestions… Corrections…
The User Documentation Department would like to know your opinion of this manual. Your feedback helps us optimize our documentation to suit your individual needs.
Feel free to send us your comments by e-mail to [email protected]
.
Certified documentation according to DIN EN ISO 9001:2008
To ensure a consistently high quality standard and user-friendliness, this documentation was created to meet the regulations of a quality management system which complies with the requirements of the standard
DIN EN ISO 9001:2008. cognitas. Gesellschaft für Technik-Dokumentation mbH www.cognitas.de
Copyright and Trademarks
Copyright © 2012 Fujitsu Technology Solutions GmbH.
All rights reserved.
Delivery subject to availability; right of technical modifications reserved.
All hardware and software names used are trademarks of their respective manufacturers.
– The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.
– Fujitsu assumes no liability for damages to third party copyrights or other rights arising from the use of any information in this manual.
– No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of Fujitsu.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and Hyper V are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.
Intel and Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the USA and other countries.
Before reading this manual
For your safety
This manual contains important information for safely and correctly using this product.
Carefully read the manual before using this product. Pay particular attention to the accompanying manual "Safety Notes and Regulations" and ensure these safety notes are understood before using the product. Keep this manual and the manual "Safety Notes and Regulations" in a safe place for easy reference while using this product.
Radio interference
This product is a "Class A" ITE (Information Technology Equipment). In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take appropriate measures.
VCCI-A
Aluminum electrolytic capacitors
The aluminum electrolytic capacitors used in the product's printed circuit board assemblies and in the mouse and keyboard are limited-life components. Use of these components beyond their operating life may result in electrolyte leakage or depletion, potentially causing emission of foul odor or smoke.
As a guideline, in a normal office environment (25°C) operating life is not expected to be reached within the maintenance support period (5 years).
However, operating life may be reached more quickly if, for example, the product is used in a hot environment. The customer shall bear the cost of replacing replaceable components which have exceeded their operating life.
Note that these are only guidelines, and do not constitute a guarantee of trouble-free operation during the maintenance support period.
High safety use
This product has been designed and manufactured to be used in commercial and/or industrial areas as a server.
When used as visual display workplace, it must not be placed in the direct field of view to avoid incommoding reflections (applies only to TX server systems).
The device has not been designed or manufactured for uses which demand an extremely high level of safety and carry a direct and serious risk of life or body if such safety cannot be assured.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual
These uses include control of nuclear reactions in nuclear power plants, automatic airplane flight control, air traffic control, traffic control in mass transport systems, medical devices for life support, and missile guidance control in weapons systems (hereafter, "high safety use"). Customers should not use this product for high safety use unless measures are in place for ensuring the level of safety demanded of such use. Please consult the sales staff of Fujitsu if intending to use this product for high safety use.
Measures against momentary voltage drop
This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop in the power supply caused by lightning. To prevent a momentary voltage drop, use of an AC uninterruptible power supply is recommended.
(This notice follows the guidelines of Voltage Dip Immunity of Personal
Computer issued by JEITA, the Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association.)
Technology controlled by the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade
Control Law of Japan
Documents produced by Fujitsu may contain technology controlled by the
Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law of Japan. Documents which contain such technology should not be exported from Japan or transferred to non-residents of Japan without first obtaining authorization in accordance with the above law.
Harmonic Current Standards
This product conforms to harmonic current standard JIS C 61000-3-2.
Only for the Japanese market:
About SATA hard disk drives
The SATA version of this server supports hard disk drives with SATA / BC-SATA storage interfaces. Please note that the usage and operation conditions differ depending on the type of hard disk drive used.
Please refer to the following internet address for further information on the usage and operation conditions of each available type of hard disk drive: http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/harddisk/
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Only for the Japanese market:
I
Although described in this manual, some sections do not apply to the
Japanese market. These options and routines include:
– CSS (Customer Self Service)
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Version history
Issue number
1.0 / March 2012
2.0 / June 2012
Reason for update
Initial release
Notes for new hardware added
3.0 / December 2012 Added fan test procedure, changed photos of SFP+ transceiver modules
4.0 / October 2013 Deleted ENERGY STAR, updated fan test procedure
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual
Version history
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Where to find which information? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Classification of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Customer Replaceable Units (CRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Field Replaceable Units (FRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Average task duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Tools you need at hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Documents you need at hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CE conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
FCC Class A Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Basic hardware procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using diagnostics information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Locating the defective server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Determining the error class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Global Error indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Customer Self Service (CSS) indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Locating the defective component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Local diagnostic indicators on the system board . . . . . . . 54
Opening the rack door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual
Contents
Shutting down the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Extending/removing the server from the rack . . . . . . . . . 56
Disconnecting the power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Extending the server out of the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Removing the server from the telescopic rails . . . . . . . . . . 58
Opening the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Removing the fan cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Removing the housing cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Removing riser modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Removing the riser module 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Removing the riser module 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Removing the riser module 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Removing the air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Installing the air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Installing riser modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Installing the riser module 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Installing the riser module 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Installing the riser module 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Closing the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Installing the housing cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Installing the fan cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Installing the server in the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Inserting the server into the telescopic rails . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Sliding the server into the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connecting the power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Switching on the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Concluding software tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Closing the rack door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Basic software procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Starting the maintenance task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Disabling BitLocker functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Viewing boot watchdog settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Configuring boot watchdog settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Contents
Removing backup and optical disk media . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Verifying and configuring the backup software solution . . . . . 78
Note on server maintenance in a Multipath I/O environment . . 78
Switching on the ID indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Completing the maintenance task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Updating the system board BIOS and iRMC . . . . . . . . . . 81
Verifying system information backup / restore . . . . . . . . . . 83
Updating RAID controller firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Enabling Option ROM scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Verifying and configuring the backup software solution . . . . . 86
Resetting the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Viewing the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Resetting the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality . . . . . . . . . . 88
Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS . . . . . . . 89
Verifying the memory mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Verifying the system time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL) . . . . . . . 91
Viewing the SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Clearing the SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment . . . 92
Enabling BitLocker functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Performing a RAID array rebuild . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses . . . . . . . . . . 95
Looking up MAC addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Looking up WWN addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuring LAN teaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers . . . . . . . . . 98
After replacing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Switching off the ID indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Performing a fan test after replacing a defective fan . . . . . . 99
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
General equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Installing a power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual
Contents
Removing the dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Installing the power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Removing a power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Removing the power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Installing the dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Replacing a power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Removing the defective power supply module . . . . . . . . . 110
Installing the new power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Replacing the power distribution board . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Removing the defective power distribution board . . . . . . . . 112
Installing the new power distribution board . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Hard disk drives / solid state drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
General equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Configuration with up to four HDD/SSD modules . . . . . . . . 119
Configuration with up to eight HDD/SSD modules . . . . . . . 119
Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Removing the 2.5-inch dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Installing the 2.5-inch dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Contents
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Replacing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Removing the defective 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . 127
Installing the new 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . 127
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Replacing the 4xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Removing the defective 4xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Installing the new 4xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Replacing the 8xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Removing the defective 8xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Installing the new 8xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Converting to configuration up to eight HDD/SSD modules 139
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Removing the 4xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Removing the ODD cable and ODD cage . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Installing the 2xHDD cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Installing the 8xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Installing the HDD/SSD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Replacing a fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Removing the defective fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Installing the new fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual
Contents
Expansion cards and backup units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Equipping the PCIe slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Additional tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Installing expansion card slot brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Installing an expansion card slot bracket . . . . . . . . . . 157
Installing SFP+ transceiver modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Installing the first SFP+ transceiver module . . . . . . . . . 164
Installing the second SFP+ transceiver module . . . . . . . 167
Removing expansion card slot brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Removing an expansion card slot bracket . . . . . . . . . 167
Replacing SFP+ transceiver modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Removing the SFP+ transceiver module . . . . . . . . . . 168
Installing the SFP+ transceiver module . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Expansion cards and riser cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Installing an expansion card in riser module 1 . . . . . . . . . 170
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Removing the slot cover - slot 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Installing the expansion card - slot 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Installing an expansion card in riser module 2 . . . . . . . . . 173
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Removing the slot cover - slot 2 and slot 3 . . . . . . . . . 174
Installing the expansion card - slot 2 and slot 3 . . . . . . . 175
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Installing an expansion card in riser module 3 . . . . . . . . . 177
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Installing the expansion card - slot 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Removing an expansion card in riser module 1 . . . . . . . . 180
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Removing the expansion card - slot 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Contents
Installing the slot cover - slot 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Removing an expansion card in riser module 2 . . . . . . . . . 183
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Removing the expansion card- slot 2 and slot 3 . . . . . . . 184
Installing the slot cover - slot 2 and slot 3 . . . . . . . . . . 185
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Removing an expansion card in riser module 3 . . . . . . . . . 186
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Removing the expansion card - slot 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Replacing an expansion card in riser module 1 . . . . . . . . . 188
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Removing the defective expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Installing the new expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Replacing an expansion card in riser module 2 . . . . . . . . . 190
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Removing the defective expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Installing the new expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Replacing an expansion card in riser module 3 . . . . . . . . . 192
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Removing the defective expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Installing the new expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Replacing the riser card in riser module 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Removing the defective riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Installing the new riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Replacing the riser card in riser module 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Removing the defective riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Installing the new riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual
Contents
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Replacing the riser card in riser module 3 . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Removing the defective riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Installing the new riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Replacing TFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Removing the defective TFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Installing the new TFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Backup units (BBU/FBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Installing the BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Connecting the BBU cable to the BBU . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Installing the BBU in the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Installing the BBU with the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Connecting the BBU cable to the RAID controller . . . . . . 209
Routing the BBU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Installing the FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Installing the FBU in the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Connecting the FBU cable to the FBU . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Installing the FBU with the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Installing TFM to the RAID controller (if applicable) . . . . . 216
Connecting the FBU cable to the RAID controller . . . . . . 217
Routing the FBU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Removing the BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Disconnecting the BBU cable from the RAID controller . . . 220
Removing the BBU with the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Removing the BBU from the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Disconnecting the BBU cable from the BBU . . . . . . . . 222
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Contents
Removing the FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Disconnecting the FBU cable from the RAID controller . . . 224
Removing the FBU with the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Disconnecting the FBU cable from the FBU . . . . . . . . . 226
Removing the FBU from the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Replacing the BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Removing the defective BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Installing the new BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Replacing the FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Removing the defective FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Installing the new FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
10 Main memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Memory sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Population rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Independant Channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Mirrored Channel and Performance modes . . . . . . . . . 238
Rank Sparing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Installing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Selecting the memory slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Installing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Removing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Removing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual
Contents
Replacing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Removing the defective memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Installing the new memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
11 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Supported processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
General equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Upgrading to dual processor configuration . . . . . . . . . 253
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Installing the processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Installing the heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Upgrading the main memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Installing two additional fan modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Replacing a processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Removing the heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Cleaning the heat sink underside and the processor surface . . 266
Removing the defective processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Installing the new processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Applying the thermal paste to the processor surface . . . . . . 272
Installing the heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Replacing a heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Removing the defective heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Cleaning the processor surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Installing the new heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Contents
12 Optical disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Installing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Removing the dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Installing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Removing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Removing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Installing the dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Replacing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Removing the defective ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Installing the new ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
13 Front panel and front VGA/LAN module . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Installing the front VGA and/or front LAN . . . . . . . . . . 292
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Removing the front VGA/LAN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Removing the covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Installing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Installing the front LAN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Installing the front VGA/LAN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Connecting the front VGA cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Connecting the front LAN cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Installing the front LAN card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Using the front management LAN connector . . . . . . . . . . 301
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual
Contents
Removing the front VGA and/or front LAN . . . . . . . . . 302
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Removing the front LAN card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Disconnecting the front LAN cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Disconnecting the front VGA cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Removing the front VGA/LAN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Removing the front LAN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Removing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Installing the front VGA/LAN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Replacing the front VGA cable and/or front LAN cable . . . 309
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Removing the defective front VGA cable and/or front
LAN cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Installing the new front VGA cable and/or front LAN cable . . . 310
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Replacing the front LAN card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Removing the defective front LAN card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Installing the new front LAN card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Replacing the front panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Removing the defective front panel board . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Installing the new front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
14 Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Installing the serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Removing the slot cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Installing the serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Contents
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Removing the serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Removing the serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Installing the slot cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Replacing the serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Removing the defective serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Installing the new serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
15 System board and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Installing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Installing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Installing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Installing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Removing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Removing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Removing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Removing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual
Contents
Replacing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Removing the defective UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Installing the new UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Replacing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Removing the defective TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Installing the new TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Replacing the SCU key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Removing the defective SCU key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Installing the new SCU key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Replacing the lithium battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Replacing the defective lithium battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Replacing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Removing the defective system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Installing the new system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Overview cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Contents
17 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Mechanical overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Front side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Rear side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Connectors and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
System board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Connector panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
LAN connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Indicators on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Optical drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
HDD/SSD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Settings system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Minimum startup configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual
Contents
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
1 Introduction
This Upgrade and Maintenance Manual provides instructions for the following procedures:
●
●
Upgrading the server configuration by adding optional hardware components
Upgrading the server configuration by replacing existing hardware components with superior ones.
● Replacing defective hardware components
This manual focuses on on-site maintenance tasks. It is recommended to prepare each service assignment following remote diagnostics procedures, as described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual.
I
The "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual is available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your
PRIMERGY server or online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
(EMEA market) or http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/ (Japanese market).
This manual is included on your ServerView Suite DVD 2 or available from the
Fujitsu Technology Solutions manuals server at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
.
For the Japanese market please use the following URL: http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/
V
CAUTION!
The document at hand comprises procedures of a wide range of complexity. Check the profile of qualification for technicians before assigning tasks. Before you start, carefully read
"Classification of procedures" on page 31
.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 25
Introduction
1.1
Where to find which information?
While the Upgrade and Maintenance Manual focuses on upgrade and maintenance procedures to bring the server back to normal operation, additional manuals provide detailed background information on server components and BIOS settings.
For information on documents you need to have with you when leaving for maintaining a server see
"Documents you need at hand" on page 36 .
I
PRIMERGY manuals are available in PDF format on the
ServerView Suite DVD 2. The ServerView Suite DVD 2 is part of the
ServerView Suite supplied with every server.
If you no longer have the ServerView Suite DVDs, you can obtain the relevant current versions using the order number U15000-C289 (the order number for the Japanese market: please refer to the configurator of the server http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/ ).
The PDF files of the manuals can also be downloaded free of charge from the Internet. The overview page showing the online documentation available on the Internet can be found using the URL (for EMEA market): http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
. The PRIMERGY server documentation can be accessed using the Industry standard servers navigation option.
For the Japanese market:
Please refer to the following URL for the latest product manuals: http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/
Before using the product, please check for additional information that may be available under the following URL: http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/products/note/
26 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Introduction
1.2
Notational conventions
The following notational conventions are used in this manual:
Text in italics fixed font indicates commands or menu items indicates system output indicates text to be entered by the user semi-bold fixed font
"Quotation marks" indicate names of chapters and terms that are being emphasized
Ê describes activities that must be performed in the order shown
[Abc] indicates keys on the keyboard
V
CAUTION!
Pay particular attention to texts marked with this symbol!
Failure to observe this warning may endanger your life, destroy the system or lead to the loss of data.
I indicates additional information, notes and tips indicates the procedure category in terms of complexity
and qualification requirements, see "Classification of procedures" on page 31
indicates the average task duration, see "Average task duration" on page 34
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 27
Introduction
28 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
2 Before you start
Before you start any upgrade or maintenance task, please proceed as follows:
Ê
Carefully read the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39 .
Ê
Make sure that all necessary manuals are available. Refer to the documentation overview in section
"Documents you need at hand" on page 36 . Print the PDF files if required.
Ê
Make yourself familiar with the procedure categories introduced in section
"Classification of procedures" on page 31 .
Ê
Ensure that all required tools are available according to section
"Tools you need at hand" on page 35 .
Installing optional components
The "PRIMERGY RX200 S7 Server Operating manual" gives an introduction to server features and provides an overview of available hardware options.
Use the Fujitsu ServerView Suite management software to prepare hardware expansions. ServerView Suite documentation is available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
( http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/ for the Japanese market) or from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server. Please refer to the following ServerView Suite topics:
– Operation
– Virtualization
– Maintenance
I
For the latest information on hardware options, refer to your server’s hardware configurator available online at the following address: for the EMEA market: http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/rack/primergy_rx200s7.html
for the Japanese market: http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/
Please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner for details on how to order expansion kits or spare parts. Use the Fujitsu Illustrated Spares Catalog to identify the required spare part and obtain technical data and order information. Illustrated Spares catalogs are available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com/illustrated_spares (EMEA market only).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 29
Before you start
Replacing a defective component
The global error indicators on the front and rear sides of the server report defective hardware components that need to be replaced. For further information on the controls and indicators of your server, refer to the
"PRIMERGY RX200 S7 Server Operating Manual" and section "Connectors and indicators" on page 381
.
If the system has been powered off in order to replace a non-hot plug unit, a system of PRIMERGY diagnostic indicators guides you to the defective component. The "Indicate CSS" button enables the indicator next to the defective component even if the server has been switched off and disconnected from the mains. For further information, please refer to sections
"Using diagnostics information" on page 51
and "Front panel" on page 387 .
If the defective component is a customer replaceable unit included in the CSS concept (Customer Self Service, only available for EMEA market), the CSS indicators on the front and rear side of the server will light up.
For further information, refer to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept
(LSC)" manual available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your
PRIMERGY server or online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
(EMEA market) or http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/ (Japanese market).
It is recommended to prepare local maintenance tasks using remote diagnostics procedures, as described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept
(LSC)" manual.
30 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Before you start
2.1
Classification of procedures
The complexity of maintenance procedures varies significantly. Procedures have been assigned to one of three unit categories, indicating the level of difficulty and required qualification.
At the beginning of each procedure, the involved unit type is indicated by one of the symbols introduced in this section.
I
Please ask your local Fujitsu service center for more detailed information.
2.1.1
Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)
Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)
Customer Replaceable Units are intended for customer self service and may be installed or replaced as hot-plug components during operation.
Hot-plug components increase system availability and guarantee a high degree of data integrity and fail-safe performance. Procedures can be carried out without shutting down the server or going offline.
Components that are handled as Customer Replaceable Units
– Hot-plug power supply modules
– Hot-plug HDD / SSD modules
– Hot-plug fan modules
Peripherals that are handled as Customer Replaceable Units
– Keyboard
– Mouse
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 31
Before you start
2.1.2
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Upgrade and Repair Units are non hot-plug components that can be ordered separately to be installed as options (Upgrade Units) or are available to the customer through customer self service (Repair Units).
I
Server management error messages and diagnostic indicators on the front panel and system board will report defective Upgrade and Repair
Units as customer replaceable CSS components.
Upgrade and repair procedures involve shutting down and opening the server.
V
CAUTION!
The device may be seriously damaged or cause damage if it is opened without authorization or if repairs are attempted by unauthorized and untrained personnel.
Components that are handled as Upgrade Units
– Optical disk drives
– Expansion cards
– Battery backup units
– Memory modules
– Processors (upgrade kits)
– Front LAN/VGA module
Components that are handled solely as Repair Units
– CMOS battery
32 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Before you start
2.1.3
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Removing and installing Field Replaceable Units involves complex maintenance procedures on integral server components. Procedures will require shutting down, opening and disassembling the server.
V
CAUTION!
Maintenance procedures involving Field Replaceable Units must be performed exclusively by Fujitsu service personnel or technicians trained by Fujitsu. Please note that unauthorized interference with the system will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.
Components that are handled as Field Replaceable Units
– Processor (replacement)
– SAS / SATA backplanes
– Power distribution board
– Front panel module
– Management and diagnostics modules
– System board
– Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
– USB Flash Module (UFM)
I
Please ask your local Fujitsu service center for more detailed information.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 33
Before you start
2.2
Average task duration
Average task duration: 10 minutes
The average task duration including preliminary and concluding steps is indicated at the beginning of each procedure next to the procedure class.
Refer to table 1 on page 34 for an overview of steps taken into account for
calculating the average task duration:
Step
Server shutdown
Rack removal, disassembly
Transport
Maintenance procedures
Transport
Assembly, rack installation
Starting up included Explanation
Shutdown time depends on hardware and software configuration and may vary significantly.
no
Software tasks necessary before maintenance are described in section
"Starting the maintenance task" on page 75 .
yes no yes no yes no making the server available, removing the server from the rack (if applicable)
Transporting the server to the service table
(where required) depends on local customer conditions.
maintenance procedures including preliminary and concluding software tasks
Returning the server to its installation site
(where required) depends on local customer conditions.
reassembling the server, installing the server in the rack (if applicable)
Booting time depends on hardware and software configuration and may vary significantly.
Table 1: Calculation of the average task duration
34 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Before you start
2.3
Tools you need at hand
When preparing the maintenance task, ensure that all required tools are available according to the overview below. You will find a list of required tools at the beginning of each procedure.
Screw driver/ bit insert
Screw Usage Type
Phillips
PH2 / (+) No. 2
Chassis
M3 x 4.5 mm
(silver)
C26192-Y10-
C67
Phillips
PH2 / (+) No. 2
System board
M3 x 6 mm
(silver)
C26192-Y10-
C68
Special bit insert TPM screw
REM 3 x 15 mm
(black)
C26192-Y10-
C176
Phillips
PH1 / (+) No. 1
UFM nylon screw
M3 x 4.5 mm
(white)
A3C40109082
Phillips
PH1 / (+) No. 1
TFM module M2.5 x 4 mm
(silver)
C26192-Y10-
C103
Table 2: List of used screws (not applicable for the Japanese market)
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 35
Before you start
2.4
Documents you need at hand
Maintenance procedures may include references to additional documentation.
When preparing the maintenance task, ensure that all required manuals are available according to the overview below.
I
– Ensure to store all printed manuals enclosed with your server in a save place for future reference.
– Unless stated otherwise, all manuals are available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
under Industry standard servers or from the
ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server.
For the Japanese market please use the following address: http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/
36 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Before you start
Document
"Quick Start Hardware -
PRIMERGY Server RX200 S7" leaflet
"PRIMERGY ServerView Suite -
Overview & Installation" DVD booklet
"Safety notes and regulations" manual
Description
Quick installation poster for initial operation, available only in printed form
DVD booklet on initial software configuration included as a printed copy with the ServerView Suite
Important safety information, available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2, online, or as a printed copy
" 安全上のご注意 " for the
Japanese market
"PRIMERGY RX200 S7 Server
Operating Manual"
"D3032 BIOS Setup Utility for
PRIMERGY RX200 S7
Reference Manual"
System board label available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 or online
Information on configurable BIOS options and parameters, available from the
ServerView Suite DVD 2 or online
Label inside the housing cover outlining connectors, indicators and jumper
– "ServerView Suite Local Service
Concept (LSC)" user guide
Software documentation
Illustrated Spares catalog
Glossary
– "ServerView Operations Manager -
Server Management" user guide
Spare parts identification and information system (EMEA market only), available for online use or download (Windows OS) at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com/illustrated_spares or from the CSS component view of the
ServerView Operations Manager available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 or online
"Warranty" manual
" 保証書 " for the Japanese market
Important information on warranty regulations, recycling and service, available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2, online, or as a printed copy
Table 3: Documentation you need at hand
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 37
Before you start
Document
"Returning used devices" manual
"Service Desk" leaflet
" サポート&サービス " for the
Japanese market
Description
Recycling and contact information, available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2, online, or as a printed copy
Additional documentation
– "iRMC S2 / S3" user guide available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 or online
– RAID documentation, available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
under
Industry standard servers - Expansion
Cards - Storage Adapters
– Rack documentation
– "Integrated RAID for SAS User’s Guide"
Third party documentation
– "SAS Software User’s Guide"
– "Modular RAID Controller Installation
Guide"
– Operating system documentation, online help
– Peripherals documentation
Table 3: Documentation you need at hand
38 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
3 Important information
V
CAUTION!
Before installing and starting up a device, please observe the safety instructions listed in the following section. This will help you to avoid making serious errors that could impair your health, damage the device and endanger the data base.
I
Keep this manual and the other documentation (such as the operating manual, documentation DVD) close to the device. All documentation must be included if the equipment is passed on to a third party.
3.1
Safety instructions
I
The following safety instructions are also provided in the manual "Safety
Notes and Regulations" or " 安全上のご注意 ".
This device meets the relevant safety regulations for IT equipment. If you have any questions about whether you can install the server in the intended environment, please contact your sales outlet or our customer service team.
● The actions described in this manual shall be performed by technical specialists. A technical specialist is a person who is trained to install the server including hardware and software.
●
●
●
Repairs to the device that do not relate to CSS failures shall be performed by service personnel. Please note that unauthorized interference with the system will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.
Any failure to observe the guidelines in this manual, and any improper repairs could expose the user to risks (electric shock, energy hazards, fire hazards) or damage the equipment.
Before installing/removing internal options to/from the server, turn off the server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cords from the power outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock or damage.
Before starting up
● During installation and before operating the device, observe the instructions on environmental conditions for your device.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 39
Important information
●
●
If the device is brought in from a cold environment, condensation may form both inside and on the outside of the device.
Wait until the device has acclimatized to room temperature and is absolutely dry before starting it up. Material damage may be caused to the device if this requirement is not observed.
Transport the device only in the original packaging or in packaging that protects it from knocks and jolts.
For the Japanese market, transporting the device in its original packaging does not apply.
Installation and operation
●
●
●
●
●
This unit should not be operated in ambient temperatures above 35 °C.
If the unit is integrated into an installation that draws power from an industrial power supply network with an IEC309 connector, the power supply's fuse protection must comply with the requirements for non-industrial power supply networks for type A connectors.
The unit automatically adjusts itself to a mains voltage in a range of 100 V -
240 V. Ensure that the local mains voltage lies within these limits.
This device must only be connected to properly grounded power outlets or connected to the grounded rack internal power distribution system with tested and approved power cords.
Ensure that the device is connected to a properly grounded power outlet close to the device.
●
●
●
●
Ensure that the power sockets on the device and the properly grounded power outlets are easily accessible.
The On/Off button or the main power switch (if present) does not isolate the device from the mains power supply. In case of repair or servicing disconnect the device completely from the mains power supply, unplug all power plugs from the properly grounded power outlets.
Always connect the server and the attached peripherals to the same power circuit. Otherwise you run the risk of losing data if, for example, the server is still running but a peripheral device (e.g. memory subsystem) fails during a power outage.
Data cables must be adequately shielded.
40 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Important information
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Ethernet cabling has to comply with EN 50173 and EN 50174-1/2 standards or ISO/IEC 11801 standard respectively. The minimum requirement is a
Category 5 shielded cable for 10/100 Ethernet, or a Category 5e cable for
Gigabit Ethernet.
Route the cables in such a way that they do not create a potential hazard
(make sure no-one can trip over them) and that they cannot be damaged.
When connecting the server, refer to the relevant instructions in this manual.
Never connect or disconnect data transmission lines during a storm (risk of lightning hazard).
Make sure that no objects (e.g. jewelry, paperclips etc.) or liquids can get inside the server (risk of electric shock, short circuit).
In emergencies (e.g. damaged casing, controls or cables, penetration of liquids or foreign bodies), contact the system administrator or your customer service team. Only disconnect the system from the mains power supply if there is no risk of harming yourself.
Proper operation of the system (in accordance with IEC 60950-1 resp.
EN 60950-1) is only ensured if the casing is completely assembled and the rear covers for the installation slots have been fitted (electric shock, cooling, fire protection, interference suppression).
Only install system expansions that satisfy the requirements and rules governing safety and electromagnetic compatibility and those relating to telecommunication terminals. If you install other expansions, they may damage the system or violate the safety regulations. Information on which system expansions are approved for installation can be obtained from our customer service center or your sales outlet.
The components marked with a warning notice (e.g. lightning symbol) may only be opened, removed or exchanged by authorized, qualified personnel.
Exception: CSS components can be replaced.
The warranty is void if the server is damaged during installation or replacement of system expansions.
Only set screen resolutions and refresh rates that are specified in the operating manual for the monitor. Otherwise, you may damage your monitor.
If you are in any doubt, contact your sales outlet or customer service center.
Before installing/removing internal options to/from the server, turn off the server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cords from the outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 41
Important information
●
●
●
●
●
●
Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock and will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.
Devices inside the server remain hot after shutdown. Wait for a while after shutdown before installing or removing internal options.
The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. To ensure reliable protection, if you are wearing an earthing band on your wrist when working with this type of module, connect it to an unpainted, non-conducting metal part of the system.
Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas or the edges of the circuit boards.
Install the screw removed during installation/detaching internal options in former device/position. To use a screw of the different kind can cause a breakdown of equipment.
The installation indicated on this document is sometimes changed to the kind of possible options without notice.
Batteries
●
●
●
●
●
●
Incorrect replacement of batteries may lead to a risk of explosion. The batteries may only be replaced with identical batteries or with a type recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not throw batteries into the trash can.
Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.
Make sure that you insert the battery the right way round.
The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not disassemble, heat about 100 °C (212F), or incinerate the battery.
All batteries containing pollutants are marked with a symbol (a crossed-out garbage can). In addition, the marking is provided with the chemical symbol of the heavy metal decisive for the classification as a pollutant:
Cd Cadmium
Hg Mercury
Pb Lead
42 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Important information
Working with CDs/DVDs/BDs and optical drives
When working with devices with optical drives, these instructions must be followed.
V
CAUTION!
● Only use CDs/DVDs/BDs that are in perfect condition, in order to prevent data loss, equipment damage and injury.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check each CD/DVD/BD for damage, cracks, breakages etc. before inserting it in the drive.
Note that any additional labels applied may change the mechanical properties of a CD/DVD/BD and cause imbalance.
Damaged and imbalanced CDs/DVDs/BDs can break at high drive speeds (data loss).
Under certain circumstances, sharp CD/DVD/BD fragments can pierce the cover of the optical drive (equipment damage) and can fly out of the device (danger of injury, particularly to uncovered body parts such as the face or neck).
High humidity and airborne dust levels are to be avoided. Electric shocks and/or server failures may be caused by liquids such as water, or metallic items, such as paper clips, entering a drive.
Shocks and vibrations are also to be avoided.
Do not insert any objects other than the specified CDs/DVDs/BDs.
Do not pull on, press hard, or otherwise handle the CD/DVD/BD tray roughly.
Do not disassemble the optical drive.
Before use, clean the optical disk tray using a soft, dry cloth.
As a precaution, remove disks from the optical drive when the drive is not to be used for a long time. Keep the optical disk tray closed to prevent foreign matter, such as dust, from entering the optical drive.
Hold CDs/DVDs/BDs by their edges to avoid contact with the disk surface.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 43
Important information
●
●
●
●
●
●
Do not contaminate the CD/DVD/BD surface with fingerprints, oil, dust, etc. If dirty, clean with a soft, dry cloth, wiping from the center to the edge. Do not use benzene, thinners, water, record sprays, antistatic agents, or silicone-impregnated cloth.
Be careful not to damage the CD/DVD/BD surface.
Keep the CDs/DVDs/BDs away from heat sources.
Do not bend or place heavy objects on CDs/DVDs/BDs.
Do not write with ballpoint pen or pencil on the label (printed) side.
Do not attach stickers or similar to the label side. Doing so may cause rotational eccentricity and abnormal vibrations.
●
●
When a CD/DVD/BD is moved from a cold place to a warm place, moisture condensation on the CD/DVD/BD surface can cause data read errors. In this case, wipe the CD/DVD/BD with a soft, dry cloth then let it air dry. Do not dry the CD/DVD/BD using devices such as a hair dryer.
To avoid dust, damage, and deformation, keep the CD/DVD/BD in its case whenever it is not in use.
● Do not store CDs/DVDs/BDs at high temperatures. Areas exposed to prolonged direct sunlight or near heating appliances are to be avoided.
I
You can prevent damage from the optical drive and the CDs/DVDs/BDs, as well as premature wear of the disks, by observing the following suggestions:
– Only insert disks in the drive when needed and remove them after use.
– Store the disks in suitable sleeves.
– Protect the disks from exposure to heat and direct sunlight.
Laser information
The optical drive complies with IEC 60825-1 laser class 1.
V
CAUTION!
The optical drive contains a light-emitting diode (LED), which under certain circumstances produces a laser beam stronger than laser class 1. Looking directly at this beam is dangerous.
Never remove parts of the optical drive casing!
44 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Important information
Modules with Electrostatic-Sensitive Devices
Modules with electrostatic-sensitive devices are identified by the following sticker:
Figure 1: ESD label
When you handle components fitted with ESDs, you must always observe the following points:
●
●
Switch off the system and remove the power plugs from the power outlets before installing or removing components with ESDs.
You must always discharge static build-up (e.g. by touching a grounded object) before working with such components.
●
●
Any devices or tools that are used must be free of electrostatic charge.
Wear a suitable grounding cable that connects you to the external chassis of the system unit.
● Always hold components with ESDs at the edges or at the points marked green (touch points).
● Do not touch any connectors or conduction paths on an ESD.
● Place all the components on a pad which is free of electrostatic charge.
I
For a detailed description of how to handle ESD components, see the relevant European or international standards (EN 61340-5-1,
ANSI/ESD S20.20).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 45
Important information
Transporting the server
●
●
●
Only transport the server in its original packaging or in packaging that protects it from impacts and jolts.
For the Japanese market, transporting the device in its original packaging does not apply.
Do not unpack the server until it is at its installation location.
If you need to lift or transport the server, ask other people to help you.
Notes on installing the server in the rack
● For safety reasons, at least two people are required to install the server
in the rack because of its weight and size.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
(For the Japanese market, please refer to " 安全上のご注意 ".)
Never lift the server into the rack using the handles on the front panel.
When connecting and disconnecting cables, observe the relevant instructions in the "Important Information" chapter of the technical manual for the corresponding rack. The technical manual is supplied with the corresponding rack.
When installing the rack, make sure that the anti-tilt protection is correctly fitted.
For safety reasons, no more than one unit may be removed from the rack at any one time during installation and maintenance work.
If several units are simultaneously removed from the rack, there is a risk that the rack could tip over.
The rack must be connected to the power supply by an authorized specialist
(electrician).
If the server is integrated into an installation that draws power from an industrial power supply network with an IEC309 type connector, the power supply's fuse protection must comply with the requirements for nonindustrial power supply networks for the type A connector.
46 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Important information
3.2
CE conformity
The system complies with the requirements of the EC directives
2004/108/EC regarding "Electromagnetic Compatibility" and
2006/95/EC "Low Voltage Directive". This is indicated by the CE marking (CE = Communauté Européenne).
3.3
FCC Class A Compliance Statement
If there is an FCC statement on the device, it applies to the products covered in this manual, unless otherwise specified herein. The statement for other products will appear in the accompanying documentation.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
"Class A" digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules and meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003 for digital apparatus. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in strict accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no warranty that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
●
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between equipment and the receiver.
● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Fujitsu is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Fujitsu. The correction of interferences caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 47
Important information
The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional peripheral or host devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC and ICES rules.
WARNING:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
3.4
Environmental protection
Environmentally-friendly product design and development
This product has been designed in accordance with the Fujitsu standard for
"environmentally friendly product design and development". This means that key factors such as durability, selection and labeling of materials, emissions, packaging, ease of dismantling and recycling have been taken into account.
This saves resources and thus reduces the harm done to the environment.
Further information can be found at:
– http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.html
(for the EMEA market)
– http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/concept/ (for the Japanese market)
Energy-saving information
Devices that do not need to be constantly switched on should be switched off until they are needed as well as during long breaks and after completion of work.
Packaging information
This packaging information doesn’t apply to the Japanese market.
Do not throw away the packaging. You may need it later for transporting the system. If possible, the equipment should only be transported in its original packaging.
Information on handling consumables
Please dispose of printer consumables and batteries in accordance with the applicable national regulations.
48 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Important information
In accordance with EU directives, batteries must not be disposed of with unsorted domestic waste. They can be returned free of charge to the manufacturer, dealer or an authorized agent for recycling or disposal.
All batteries containing pollutants are marked with a symbol (a crossed-out garbage can). They are also marked with the chemical symbol for the heavy metal that causes them to be categorized as containing pollutants:
Cd Cadmium
Hg Mercury
Pb Lead
Labels on plastic casing parts
Please avoid sticking your own labels on plastic parts wherever possible, since this makes it difficult to recycle them.
Returns, recycling and disposal
Please handle returns, recycling and disposal in accordance with local regulations.
The device must not be disposed of with domestic waste. This device is labeled in compliance with European directive
2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE).
This directive sets the framework for returning and recycling used equipment and is valid across the EU. When returning your used device, please use the return and collection systems available to you. Further information can be found at http://ts.fujitsu.com/recycling .
Details regarding the return and recycling of devices and consumables within
Europe can also be found in the "Returning used devices" manual, via your local
Fujitsu branch or from our recycling center in Paderborn:
Fujitsu Technology Solutions
Recycling Center
D-33106 Paderborn
Tel. +49 5251 525 1410
Fax +49 5251 525 32 1410
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 49
Important information
50 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
4 Basic hardware procedures
4.1
Using diagnostics information
The "PRIMERGY RX200 S7 Server Operating Manual" gives an introduction to server features and provides an overview of available hardware options.
Use the Fujitsu ServerView Suite management software to plan the upgrade or replacement of hardware components. ServerView Suite documentation is available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
or from the ServerView Suite
DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server. Please refer to the following
ServerView Suite topics:
– Operation
– Maintenance
It is recommended to prepare local maintenance tasks using remote diagnostics procedures, as described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept
(LSC)" manual available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your
PRIMERGY server or online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
(EMEA market) or http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/ (Japanese market).
Please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner for details on the service concept and on how to order expansion kits or spare parts. Use the
Fujitsu Illustrated Spares Catalog to identify the required spare part and obtain technical data and order information. Illustrated Spares catalogs are available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com/illustrated_spares (EMEA market only).
Perform the following diagnostics procedures to identify defective servers and components.
4.1.1
Locating the defective server
When working in a datacenter environment, switch on the ID indicator on the front and rear connector panels of the server (see section
"Connectors and indicators" on page 381
) for easy identification.
Ê
Press the ID button on the front panel or use the ServerView Operation
Manager user interface to switch on the system identification LEDs.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 51
Basic hardware procedures
I
For further information, refer to the "ServerView Suite Local Service
Concept (LSC)" manual available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server or online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
(EMEA market) or http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/ (Japanese market).
Ê
When using ServerView Operations Manager to toggle the ID indicator, choose Single System View and press the Locate button.
Ê
Remember to switch off the ID indicator after the maintenance task has been concluded successfully.
4.1.2
Determining the error class
The Local Service Concept (LSC) allows you to identify defective server components. Failure events are assigned to one of two error classes:
– Global Error events that need to be resolved by maintenance personnel
– Customer Self Service (CSS) error events that may be resolved by operating personnel
Global Error and CSS LEDs indicate, if the defective component is a customer replaceable unit or if maintenance personnel needs to be dispatched to replace the part.
I
The indicators also light up in standby mode and after a server restart due to a power failure.
4.1.2.1
Global Error indicator
Ê
Check the Global Error indicator on the front or connector panel of the server
(see section
"Connectors and indicators" on page 381
).
52 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic hardware procedures
Indicator
Global error indicator
Status off orange on orange flashing
Description no critical event (non CSS component) prefailure detected (non CSS component), requires (precautionary) service intervention non CSS component failure or software / agent related error, requires service intervention
Ê
For further diagnostics, proceed as follows:
– Hardware errors:
Check the System Event Log (SEL) as described in section
– Software / agent related errors:
Check the ServerView System Monitor, available on Windows or Linux based servers with ServerView agents installed.
I
For further information, please refer to the "ServerView System
Monitor" user guide, available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
or from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your
PRIMERGY server.
4.1.2.2
Customer Self Service (CSS) indicator
Ê
Check the CSS indicator on the front panel or connector panel of the server
(see section "Connectors and indicators" on page 381 ).
Indicator
CSS indicator
Status yellow flashing
Description off no critical event (CSS component) yellow on prefailure detected (CSS component)
CSS component failure
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 53
Basic hardware procedures
4.1.3
Locating the defective component
After determining the error class by the CSS or Global Error indicators local diagnostic indicators on the system board, HDD modules and power supply modules allow you to identify the defective component (see section
"Connectors and indicators" on page 381
).
I
For further information, refer to the "ServerView Suite Local Service
Concept (LSC)" manual available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server or online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
(EMEA market) or http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/ (Japanese market).
4.1.3.1
Local diagnostic indicators on the system board
Using the Indicate CSS button
Ê
Shut down and power off the server.
Ê
Disconnect the AC power cord(s) from the system.
I
It is mandatory to disconnect power cords in order to use the Indicate
CSS functionality.
Ê
Press the Indicate CSS button to highlight defective components (see
section "Connectors and indicators" on page 381 ).
I
In addition to local diagnostic indicators, CSS or Global Error LEDs indicate, if the defective component is a customer replaceable unit or if a service technician needs to be dispatched to replace the part (see section
"Determining the error class" on page 52
).
If the system has been powered off to replace a non hot-plug unit, a system of PRIMERGY diagnostics indicators guides you to the faulty component.
54 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic hardware procedures
4.2
Opening the rack door
I
The following description only applies to the PRIMECENTER M1 rack.
For further instructions on opening or closing the 19-inch rack, please refer to the "19-inch Rack for PRIMERGY and RM systems" assembly guide, available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
or from the
ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server.
Ê
Insert and turn the key clockwise by 180 degrees.
Ê
Grasp the green marked grip and swivel it outward.
I
For further information, refer to the "PRIMECENTER M1 Rack System" assembly guide available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
or from the
ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server.
4.3
Shutting down the server
V
CAUTION!
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
I
This step is only required when upgrading or replacing non-hot plug components.
Ê
Inform the system administrator that the server will be shut down and put offline.
Ê
Terminate all applications.
Ê
In case of Multipath I/O environments, see section
"Note on server maintenance in a Multipath I/O environment" on page 78 .
Ê
Shut down the server.
I
If the system is running an ACPI-compliant operating system, the pressing the On / Off button will performs a graceful shutdown.
Ê
Switch on the ID indicator on the front and rear connector panels of the server as described in section
"Locating the defective server" on page 51 .
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 55
Basic hardware procedures
4.4
Extending/removing the server from the rack
I
In most cases maintenance tasks can be performed while the server is extended from the rack. However, depending on accessibility or security guidelines, it may make sense to completely remove the server from the rack cabinet for maintenance purposes.
V
CAUTION!
● Use the anti-tilt plate to prevent the rack from tipping when installing the rack. Pulling the server out of the rack without having installed the anti-tilt plate may cause the rack to tip over.
● Be careful not to pinch fingers or clothes when sliding out the server or pushing it back. Failure to do so may cause injury.
● Follow the safety instructions in chapter
"Important information" on page 39 .
4.4.1
Disconnecting the power cord
0
/
Figure 2: Unlocking the cable clamp of a power supply module
Ê
Press the cable clamp down until it disengages (1).
56 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic hardware procedures
Ê
Open the cable clamp (2).
Ê
Pull all power cords out of the power outlets and remove them from the cable clamps.
4.4.2
Extending the server out of the rack
Ê
Disconnect all cables on the rear of the server.
0
0
Figure 3: Extending the server out of the rack
Ê
Pull the quick-release levers down on both sides (1).
Ê
Extend the server carefully out of the rack as far as possible (2).
V
CAUTION!
Do not use the pulled-out server as a surface on which to put things or as a work surface, and strictly avoid leaning on or against it.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 57
Basic hardware procedures
4.4.3
Removing the server from the telescopic rails
V
CAUTION!
At least two people are needed to lift the server out of the rack cabinet.
(For the Japanese market, please refer to " 安全上のご注意 ".)
Additionally, a lifter is required in the following cases:
– The server weighs more than 50 kg.
– The server weighs more than 21 kg and is installed above the height of 25 U.
When using a lifter, this removal procedure needs to be carried out by maintenance personnel.
0
/
Figure 4: Removing the server from the telescopic rails
Ê
Release the locking bars on both telescopic rails (1).
Ê
Lift the server out of the telescopic rails (2) and place it on an even surface.
58 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic hardware procedures
4.5
Opening the server
V
CAUTION!
● Only for non-hot plug components:
Before removing or attaching covers, turn off the server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cords from the outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock.
●
●
The top cover must be replaced as soon as possible for purposes of cooling, to comply with EMC regulations (regulations regarding electromagnetic compatibility) and to prevent fires.
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
4.5.1
Removing the fan cover
You must remove the fan cover before removing the housing cover.
Figure 5: Removing the fan cover
Ê
Push the two green buttons (1) in the direction of the arrow.
Ê
Lift the fan cover upward and remove it (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 59
Basic hardware procedures
4.5.2
Removing the housing cover
Figure 6: Removing the housing cover
Ê
Push the housing cover as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow (1).
Ê
Lift off the housing cover upward (2).
60 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
4.6
Removing riser modules
Basic hardware procedures
4.6.1
Removing the riser module 1
Figure 7: Removing the riser module 1
Ê
Carefully pull out the riser module 1 upward.
4.6.2
Removing the riser module 2
Figure 8: Removing the riser module 2
Ê
Carefully pull out the riser module 2 upward.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 61
Basic hardware procedures
4.6.3
Removing the riser module 3
Figure 9: Removing the riser module 3
Ê
Carefully pull out the riser module 3 upward.
62 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
4.7
Removing the air duct
Basic hardware procedures
Figure 10: Removing the air duct
Ê
Carefully pull out the air duct upward.
4.8
Installing the air duct
Figure 11: Installing the air duct
Ê
Install the air duct. Notice the hooks (see close-ups) and the guidings (see orange lines).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 63
Basic hardware procedures
4.9
Installing riser modules
4.9.1
Installing the riser module 1
Figure 12: Installing the riser module 1
Ê
Insert the riser card into the system board slot.
Ê
Press down the riser card module 1 using the green touch points.
64 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
4.9.2
Installing the riser module 2
Basic hardware procedures
Figure 13: Installing the riser module 2
Ê
Insert the two riser cards into the system board slots.
Ê
Press down the riser card module 2 using the green touch points.
Ê
If necessary, connect the cables to the other components.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 65
Basic hardware procedures
4.9.3
Installing the riser module 3
Figure 14: Installing the riser module 3
Ê
Insert the riser card into the system board slot and the two recesses (see close-up).
Ê
Press down the riser card module 3 using the green touch points.
Ê
If necessary, connect the cables to the other components.
66 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic hardware procedures
4.10 Closing the server
V
CAUTION!
● Before attaching the covers, make sure no unnecessary parts or tools are left inside the server.
● The top cover must be replaced as soon as possible for purposes of cooling, to comply with EMC regulations (regulations regarding electromagnetic compatibility) and to prevent fires.
●
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
4.10.1 Installing the housing cover
Figure 15: Installing the housing cover
Ê
Position the housing cover so that it protrudes somewhat over the rear edge
(1).
Make sure that each bolt is positioned in the corresponding nut.
Ê
Push the housing cover as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 67
Basic hardware procedures
4.10.2 Installing the fan cover
Figure 16: Inserting the fan cover in a slight angle
Ê
Insert the fan cover in a slight angle.
Figure 17: Installing the fan cover
Ê
Push the fan cover down (1).
Ê
Push the edges of the fan cover down until the two green buttons engage
(2).
I
For a correct sliding the server into the rack, the height of the fan cover and the chassis top must be on the same level. If the fan cover is higher, push it down again until the level is equal.
68 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic hardware procedures
4.11
Installing the server in the rack
V
CAUTION!
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
I
Refer to the rack cabinet manuals for more detailed information on other support systems.
4.11.1 Inserting the server into the telescopic rails
V
CAUTION!
At least two people are needed to lift the server into the rack cabinet.
(For the Japanese market, please refer to " 安全上のご注意 ".)
Additionally, a lifter is required in the following cases:
– The server weighs more than 50 kg.
– The server weighs more than 21 kg and is installed above the height of 25 U.
When using a lifter, this removal procedure needs to be carried out by maintenance personnel.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 69
Basic hardware procedures
1
/
/
0
2
Figure 18: Inserting the server into the telescopic rails
Ê
Fully extend the telescopic rails until they lock in place (1).
I
The telescopic rails must click into place so that they can no longer be moved.
Ê
At a slight angle, lower the server onto the rear mounting point on the telescopic rails (2).
Ê
Fold down the server, while pressing the rail to the server side (3). Ensure that all six rack mounting bolts are properly seated in the mounting points on the telescopic rails and that the locking bars engage (4).
70 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic hardware procedures
4.11.2 Sliding the server into the rack
0
0
/
Figure 19: Sliding the server into the rack
Ê
Check if the height of the fan cover and the chassis top are on the same level
If the fan cover is higher, push it down again until the level is equal.
Ê
Release the locking mechanism of both rails (1).
Ê
Push the server as far as it will go into the rack (2) until the quick-release levers engage (3).
V
CAUTION!
Be careful with your fingers. You can pinch them when the quickrelease levers change to the release position.
Ê
Reconnect all the cables you disconnected beforehand on the rear of the server.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 71
Basic hardware procedures
4.11.3 Connecting the power cord
Ê
Connect all power cords to the power outlets.
I
To provide true phase redundancy, the second power supply module should be connected to a different AC power source from the other supply module. If one AC power source should fail, the server will still continue to run.
Ê
Ensure that the indicator on the PSU module lights up green.
I
For more information see section
"Power supply modules" on page 393 .
Figure 20: Locking the cable clamp of a power supply module
Ê
Pull the cable clamp up (1).
Ê
Thread the power cord through the cable clamp (2).
Ê
Press the cable clamp down until it engages to secure the cable (3).
72 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic hardware procedures
4.12 Switching on the server
V
CAUTION!
● Before switching on the server, make sure the top cover is closed. In order to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on electromagnetic compatibility) and satisfy cooling requirements, the
PRIMERGY RX200 S7 server must not run while the top cover is removed.
●
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
I
This step is only applicable to replace or expand non-hot plug components.
Ê
Press the On/Off button to start up the server.
Ê
Ensure that the power-on indicator above the On / Off button is lit green.
I
For more information see "Connectors and indicators" on page 381
.
Ê
If BitLocker functionality has been disabled when shutting down the server
(see section "Shutting down the server" on page 55
), re-enable BitLocker as
described in section "Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
.
4.13 Concluding software tasks
Ê
Perform the following software tasks to put the server back in operation:
–
"Resetting the boot retry counter" on page 86
–
"Verifying the system time settings" on page 90
–
"Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)" on page 91
–
"Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 92
–
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
–
"Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 95
–
"Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses" on page 95
–
"Configuring LAN teaming" on page 97
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 73
Basic hardware procedures
4.14 Closing the rack door
Ê
Close the rack door.
Ê
Insert and turn the key counter-clockwise by 180 degrees.
I
For further information, refer to the "PRIMECENTER M1 Rack System" assembly guide available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
or from the
ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server.
74 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
5 Basic software procedures
5.1
Starting the maintenance task
5.1.1
Disabling BitLocker functionality
BitLocker Drive Encryption provides protection for operating system and data drives by encrypting the contents and requiring users to authenticate their credentials to access the information. On the operating system drive, BitLocker uses the compatible Trusted Platform Module (TPM) to detect if the computer's startup process has been modified from its original state.
Disabling BitLocker Drive Encryption is a temporary method for removing
BitLocker protection without decrypting the drive Windows is installed on.
Disable BitLocker before modifying the server’s hardware configuration or startup files. Enable BitLocker again after the maintenance procedure is complete.
V
CAUTION!
– With BitLocker features enabled, modifying the system configuration
(hardware or firmware settings) may render the system inaccessible.
The system may enter Recovery Mode and require a 48-digits recovery password to return to normal operation.
Ensure to disable BitLocker drive encryption before maintaining the server.
– When disabled, BitLocker uses a plain text key instead of the Trusted
Platform Module (TPM) to read encrypted files. Keep in mind that information on this drive is not secure until BitLocker has been reenabled.
Ê
Ask the system administrator to disable BitLocker-protection on the operating system drive, using the BitLocker setup wizard available either from the Control Panel or Windows Explorer:
Ê
Open BitLocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking
Control Panel, clicking Security, and then clicking Bitlocker Drive
Encryption.
I
Administrator permission required: If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 75
Basic software procedures
Ê
To temporarily disable BitLocker, click Turn Off BitLocker, and then click
Disable BitLocker Drive Encryption.
I
In order to determine which features are accessible through the
BitLocker setup wizard, modify the BitLocker Group Policy settings.
For further information on how to disable BitLocker drive encryption, please refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base.
Fujitsu service partners will find additional information (also available in Japanese) on the Fujitsu Extranet web pages.
5.1.2
Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality
The ServerView Operations Manager boot watchdog determines whether the server boots within a preset time frame. If the watchdog timer expires, the system will automatically reboot.
5.1.2.1
Viewing boot watchdog settings
To view boot watchdog settings in ServerView Operations Manager, proceed as follows:
Ê
In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select Maintenance from the Information / Operation menu.
Ê
Under ASR&R select the Watchdog tab to obtain detailed information about the current watchdog status, time out intervals and actions that are triggered if watchdog timeouts are exceeded.
I
For more detailed information, refer to the "ServerView Operations
Manager - Server Management" user guide.
5.1.2.2
Configuring boot watchdog settings
If the system is to be started from removable boot media for firmware upgrade purposes, the Boot watchdog needs to be disabled before starting maintenance task. Otherwise, the Boot watchdog might initiate a system reboot before the flash process is complete.
V
CAUTION!
An incomplete firmware upgrade process may render the server inaccessible or result in damaged / destroyed hardware.
76 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic software procedures
Timer settings can be configured in the BIOS or using the ServerView iRMC web frontend:
Configuring boot watchdog settings in the BIOS
Ê
Enter the BIOS.
Ê
Select the Server Mgmt menu.
Ê
Under Boot Watchdog set the Action setting to Continue.
Ê
Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
I
For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.
Configuring boot watchdog settings using the iRMC web frontend
Ê
Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê
Select the Server Management menu.
Ê
Under Watchdog Settings select Continue from the Boot Watchdog drop down list.
Ê
Click Apply for the changes to take effect.
I
For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated
Remote Management Controller" user guide.
5.1.3
Removing backup and optical disk media
Ê
Ask the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.
Ê
If the backup media cannot be ejected by conventional means, and it is mandatory that the cartridge be removed prior to returning the drive for repair or disposing it, a manual tape extraction needs to be performed.
For further information on "forcible" tape ejection, please refer to the "Tape
Facts" guide available to Fujitsu service partners from the following https address: https://partners.ts.fujitsu.com/com/service/ps/Servers/PRIMERGY/Pages/
TapeFacts.aspx
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 77
Basic software procedures
For the Japanese market, please contact Fujitsu support, if "forcible" tape ejection is necessary.
I
Fujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage to the tape drive, the data cartridge / tape or for the loss of any data resulting from manual tape extraction procedures.
5.1.4
Verifying and configuring the backup software solution
I
This task only applies to the Japanese market.
Depending on the backup software solution, it may be necessary to disable or delete the backup drive from the backup software drive list before starting the maintenance task.
This is the case for the following backup software solution:
– BackupExec
I
Procedures may differ depending on the backup software. For details, refer to the dedicated documentation provided separately.
Further information on suitable backup software solutions and related documentation is available to Fujitsu service partners from the Fujitsu
Extranet pages.
5.1.5
Note on server maintenance in a Multipath I/O environment
When booting your server offline from the ServerView Suite DVD 1 to perform an offline driver update using the ServerView Update DVD or collect diagnostic data using PrimeCollect in a Multipath I/O environment, there is a risk of damaging the system configuration which may leave the system unable to boot.
This is a known restriction of Windows PE with Multipath drivers.
Before using the ServerView Update DVD or PrimeCollect in an offline environment, Fujitsu recommends to properly shut down the server and to disconnect all external I/O connections (like LAN or FC cables) from the system.
Only keep mouse, keyboard, video cable and AC power cord connected.
78 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic software procedures
Continue as follows:
Ê
If performing an offline driver update, first of all prepare the ServerView
Update DVD:
Ê
Download the latest ServerView Update DVD image from the Fujitsu
FTP server at: ftp://ftp.ts.fujitsu.com/images/serverview
Ê
Burn the image to a DVD.
For the Japanese market:
Ê
Locate, download and burn the ServerView Update DVD image available from the following URL: http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/products/note/svsdvd/dvd/
Ê
Ensure that all external I/O connections have been removed from the server.
I
Ensure that all external I/O connections are uniquely identified so that you can reconnect them into their original locations after concluding the task.
Ê
Switch on the server.
Ê
Right after switching on the server, insert the ServerView Suite DVD 1 into the DVD drive and close the drive tray.
The server will now boot from the DVD.
Ê
After the boot process is complete, select your preferred GUI language.
Ê
In the initial Installation Manager startup window, choose either Update
Manager Express or PrimeCollect from the Installation Manager mode section.
Ê
Click Continue to proceed.
If Update Manager Express has been selected, insert the ServerView Update
DVD into the DVD drive before proceeding.
Ê
Finish the intended maintenance task. For further information, refer to the following manuals:
– ServerView Update Manager Express:
"Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers" user guide
– PrimeCollect:
"PrimeCollect" user guide
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 79
Basic software procedures
Ê
After the update or diagnostic procedure has been completed, shut down the server, reconnect all external I/O connections and bring the system back to normal operation.
Ê
If necessary, perform this procedure for all remaining servers within the
Multipath environment.
5.1.6
Switching on the ID indicator
When working in a datacenter environment, switch on the ID indicator on the front and rear connector panels of the server for easy identification.
I
For further information, refer to section
"Locating the defective server" on page 51 or to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)"
manual.
Using the ID button on the front panel
Ê
Press the ID button on the front panel to switch on the system identification
LEDs.
I
For further information, refer to section
"Connectors and indicators" on page 381 .
Using ServerView Operations Manager
Ê
In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View and press the Locate button in the title bar to switch on the ID indicators.
80 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic software procedures
5.2
Completing the maintenance task
5.2.1
Updating the system board BIOS and iRMC
After replacing the system board, it is essential to upgrade the BIOS to the latest version.
The latest BIOS and iRMC versions are available from the Fujitsu support internet pages at: http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/ (EMEA market) http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/downloads/ (Japanese market)
I
Fujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage done to the server or for the loss of any data resulting from BIOS updates.
BIOS recovery procedure
I
For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.
Ê
Prepare a USB stick with the following files:
– Update tool
– Startup.nsh (which will execute the update tool)
– BIOS image file for update (16 MB with header information)
Ê
Shut down the server as described in section
"Shutting down the server" on page 55 and disconnect it from the mains.
Ê
Remove the top cover as described in section
"Opening the server" on page 59 .
Ê
Enter BIOS recovery mode using the onboard jumpers.
I
For detailed information on jumper settings, refer to section
.
Ê
Close the top cover as described in section "Closing the server" on page 67 .
Ê
Connect the USB stick to the USB connector.
Ê
Connect the server to the mains.
Ê
Press the On / Off button to start up the server.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 81
Basic software procedures
The system will detect the USB stick and the BIOS recovery process will be performed.
V
CAUTION!
Do not interrupt the BIOS upgrade process after it has started. If the process is interrupted, the system BIOS may be permanently corrupted.
Ê
After completion of the flash process, shut down the server.
Ê
Remove the top cover as described in section "Opening the server" on page 59
.
Ê
Disable BIOS recovery mode using the onboard jumpers:
I
For detailed information on jumper settings, refer to section "Jumper" on page 394 .
Ê
Close the top cover as described in section
"Closing the server" on page 67
.
iRMC recovery procedure
I
For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.
Ê
Prepare a USB stick including the bootable iRMC firmware update image.
Ê
Shut down the server as described in section "Shutting down the server" on page 55
and disconnect it from the mains.
Ê
Connect the USB stick to the USB connector.
I
Ensure that only the USB device with the iRMC firmware is connected to the USB connector. Remove all other USB devices temporarily.
Ê
Connect the server to the mains while pushing the ID button on the front panel. Ask a second person to help you if necessary.
Ê
Ensure that the Global Error indicator and the ID indicator are flashing to indicate that the server is entering the iRMC recovery state.
Ê
Press the Power On / Off button. The system starts the POST process.
I
In iRMC reocovery mode, the “FUJITSU” logo does not show up.
Ê
The system will detect the USB stick.
82 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic software procedures
I
If the BIOS cannot identify the USB stick, the pop-up message "Failed to boot for Emergency flash. Please Reset now." will show up in the center of the screen.
Ê
Choose the Recovery_L option from the update tool menu to start the iRMC update process.
V
CAUTION!
Do not interrupt the iRMC upgrade process after it has started. If the process is interrupted, the iRMC BIOS may be permanently corrupted.
I
If the iRMC does not work after flashing, disconnect the system from the mains and reconnect it again.
Ê
Shut down the server by pressing the power On / Off button.
Ê
Disconnect the server from the mains to exit the iRMC recovery state.
5.2.2
Verifying system information backup / restore
To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored from the Chassis ID board to the new system board.
In order to verify whether the backup or restore process has been successful, check the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView Operations Manager
(see also section "Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)" on page 91 ).
After replacing the system board
Ê
Check the SEL log files as described in section "Viewing and clearing the
System Event Log (SEL)" on page 91
to verify whether the backup data on the Chassis ID EPROM has been restored to the system board:
Chassis IDPROM: Restore successful
After replacing the Chassis ID EPROM
I
In case of the PRIMERGY RX200 S7 server, the Chassis ID EPROM is integrated on the front panel board.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 83
Basic software procedures
Ê
Check the SEL log files as described in section
System Event Log (SEL)" on page 91 to verify whether a backup copy of the
system board settings has been transferred to the Chassis ID EPROM:
Chassis IDPROM: Backup successful
5.2.3
Updating RAID controller firmware
After replacing the RAID controller, it is essential to upgrade the firmware to the latest version. The latest RAID controller firmware version is available from the
Fujitsu support web pages at: http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/ (EMEA market) http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/downloads/ (Japanese market)
I
Fujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage done to the server or for the loss of any data resulting from firmware updates.
For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.
Using the ServerView Update Manager
For a detailed description on how to update the RAID controller firmware using the ServerView Update Manager or Update Manager Express (UME), please refer to the following manuals:
– ServerView Update Manager:
"ServerView Update Management" user guide
– ServerView Update Manager Express:
"Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers" user guide
Using the flash tool
The latest firmware files are available as ASPs (Autonomous Support
Packages) for Windows or as DOS tools from the Fujitsu support web pages at: http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/ (EMEA market) http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/downloads/ (Japanese market)
Ê
Select Drivers & Downloads.
Ê
From the Select Product drop down lists, choose your PRIMERGY server or enter its serial or ident number into the search field.
Ê
Select your operating system and version.
84 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic software procedures
Ê
Select the desired component type (e.g. SAS RAID).
Ê
Select your controller from the device list to expand a compilation of available drivers and firmware.
Ê
Select the desired file and click Download for further instructions.
5.2.4
Enabling Option ROM scan
In order to configure an expansion card that has been installed or replaced, the card’s Option ROM has to be enabled in the system board BIOS. The card’s firmware is called by the system BIOS upon reboot and can be entered and configured.
Option ROM can be enabled permanently (e.g. in case of a boot controller that may require frequent setup) or temporarily for one-time configuration. When permanently enabling a controllers’s Option ROM, keep in mind that only two
Option ROMs can be activated in the system board BIOS at a time.
Ê
Enter the BIOS.
Ê
From the Advanced menu select Option ROM Configuration.
Ê
Identify the desired PCI slot and set its Launch Slot # OpROM setting to
Enabled.
Ê
Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
I
Up to two Option ROMs can be activated in the system board BIOS at a time.
For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.
When the enabled expansion card is initialized during the POST phase of the boot sequence, a key combination is displayed temporarily to enter the expansion card’s firmware.
Ê
Press the displayed key combination.
Ê
Modify the expansion card firmware options as desired.
Ê
Save your changes and exit the firmware.
I
The expansion card’s option ROM can now be disabled in the system board BIOS.
Exception: If the expansion card controls a permanent boot device, the card’s Option ROM has to remain enabled.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 85
Basic software procedures
5.2.5
Verifying and configuring the backup software solution
I
This task only applies to the Japanese market.
Disabling backup drives
Depending on the backup software solution, it may be necessary to disable or delete the backup drive from the backup software drive list and reconfigure backup jobs after completing the maintenance task.
This is the case for the following backup software solutions:
– Netvault for Windows
– ARCServe
– BackupExec
I
Procedures may differ depending on the backup software. For details, refer to the dedicated documentation provided separately.
Further information on suitable backup software solutions and related documentation is available to Fujitsu service partners from the Fujitsu
Extranet pages.
Re-enabling backup drives
If a backup drive has been disabled or deleted from the backup software drive
list as described in section 5.1.4 on page 78 , it has to be re-enabled to complete
the maintenance task.
Ê
Re-enable backup drives and revise backup software settings and cronjobs.
I
Detailed information on suitable backup software solutions and related documentation is available to Fujitsu service partners from the
Fujitsu Extranet pages
5.2.6
Resetting the boot retry counter
The boot retry counter is decremented from its preset value every time the
POST watchdog initiates a system reboot. When the value has reached ’0’, the system will shut down and power off.
86 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic software procedures
5.2.6.1
Viewing the boot retry counter
The current boot retry counter status is available in the BIOS:
Ê
Enter the BIOS.
Ê
Select the Server Mgmt menu.
Ê
Under Boot Retry Counter the current number of remaining boot attempts is displayed. The value is further decremented with every failed boot attempt or system reboot resulting from critical system errors.
Ê
Exit the BIOS.
5.2.6.2
Resetting the boot retry counter
The boot retry counter should be reset to its original value concluding every service task.
I
Please note, if the customer does not know about the original boot retry values:
If the system boots up and no further errors occur within 6 hours after that successful boot attempt, the boot retry counter will automatically be reset to its default value. Please take into account, that the specified number of boot attempts can only be determined after this period of time.
If the customer knows about the original boot retry values, proceed as follows to reset or configure the boot retry counter:
Resetting the boot retry counter in the BIOS
Ê
Enter the BIOS.
Ê
Select the Server Mgmt menu.
Ê
Under Boot Retry Counter press the [+] or [-]keys to specify the maximum number of boot attempts (0 to 7).
Ê
Exit the BIOS.
Resetting the boot retry counter using the ServerView Operations
Manager
Ê
In the ServerView Operations Manager Administration view, select Server
Configuration.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 87
Basic software procedures
Ê
If more than one server is managed in SVOM, select the target server and click Next.
Ê
From the Server Configuration menu pane, choose Restart Options.
Ê
Under Reboot Retries, specify the maximum number of boot attempts (0 to 7) in the Default for reboot tries field.
Resetting the boot retry counter using iRMC web frontend
Ê
Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê
Select the Server Management menu.
Ê
The following boot retry counter settings are available under ASR&R Options:
Ê
Under Retry counter max specify the maximum number of attempts to boot the operating system (0 to 7).
Ê
Under Retry counter the current number of remaining boot attempts is displayed. Overwrite this value with the maximum number of boot attempts specified above in order to reset the boot retry counter.
Ê
Click Apply for the changes to take effect.
I
For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated
Remote Management Controller" user guide.
5.2.7
Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality
If ServerView Operations Manager boot watchdog functionality has been
disabled for firmware upgrade purposes (see section 5.1.2 on page 76 ), it has
to be re-enabled to complete the maintenance task.
Timer settings can be configured in the BIOS or using the ServerView iRMC web frontend:
Configuring boot watchdog settings in the BIOS
Ê
Enter the BIOS.
Ê
Select the Server Mgmt menu.
Ê
Under Boot Watchdog set the Action setting to Reset.
Ê
Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
88 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic software procedures
I
For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.
Configuring boot watchdog settings using the iRMC web frontend
Ê
Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê
Select the Server Management menu.
Ê
Under Watchdog Settings ensure that the check box next to Boot Watchdog is selected. From the drop down list choose Reset and specify the desired timeout delay.
Ê
Click Apply for the changes to take effect.
I
For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated
Remote Management Controller" user guide.
5.2.8
Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS
When a processor, an expansion card, or a memory module fails, the defective component will be set to Disabled or Failed in the system BIOS. The server will then reboot with only the intact hardware components remaining in the system configuration. After replacing the defective component, it needs to be reenabled in the system board BIOS.
Ê
Enter the BIOS.
Ê
Select the Advanced menu.
Ê
Select the status menu of the desired component:
– Processors: CPU Status
I
This option is only available for multi-processor systems.
– Memory: Memory Status
– Expansion cards: PCI Status
Ê
Reset replaced components to Enable.
Ê
Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
I
For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 89
Basic software procedures
5.2.9
Verifying the memory mode
If a memory module fails, the server will reboot and the defective module will be disabled. As a result, the current operation mode (e.g. Mirrored Channel mode) may no longer be available due to a lack of identical memory module pairs. In this case, the operation mode will automatically revert to Independent Channel
Mode.
I
For further information on memory operation modes for your server, refer
to section "Memory sequence" on page 236
.
After replacing the defective module(s) the memory operation mode is automatically reset to its original state. It is recommended to verify that the operation mode has been correctly.
Ê
Enter the BIOS.
Ê
Select the Advanced menu.
Ê
Under Memory Status verify that none of the memory modules are marked as
Failed.
Ê
Save your changes (if applicable) and exit the BIOS.
I
For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.
5.2.10 Verifying the system time settings
I
This task only applies to Linux environments.
After the system board has been replaced, the system time is set automatically.
By default, the RTC (Real Time Clock) time standard is set as the local time.
If a Linux OS is used and the hardware clock has been configured as UTC
(Universal Time, Coordinated) in the operating system, the BMC local time may not be mapped correctly.
Ê
After replacing the system board, ask the system administrator whether the
RTC or UTC time standard is to be used as system time.
I
If the system time (RTC) is set to UTC, the SEL (System Event Log) time stamps may differ from the local time.
Ê
Enter the BIOS.
90 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic software procedures
Ê
Select the Main menu.
Ê
Under System Time and System Date specify the correct time and date.
I
By default, the system time set in the BIOS is RTC (Real Time Clock) local time. If your IT infrastructure relies on universally accepted time standards, set the System Time to UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated) instead. Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) can be considered equivalent to UTC.
Ê
Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
I
For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual
5.2.11 Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)
5.2.11.1 Viewing the SEL
You can view the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView Operations
Manager or the ServerView iRMC web frontend:
Viewing the SEL in ServerView Operations Manager
Ê
In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select Maintenance from the Information / Operation menu.
Ê
Under Maintenance select System Event Log.
Ê
Select the message type(s) you want to display:
– Critical events
– Major events
– Minor events
– Informational events
I
Note on the SVOM Driver Monitor
The Driver Monitor view gives you an overview of the monitored components as well as the associated events contained in the system event log on the managed server.
Under Monitored Components the monitored components are listed. If a component has the status Warning or Error, you can select it in the list and click Acknowledge. This confirms the event on the server side. You
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 91
Basic software procedures may have to log on to the server beforehand. The status of the component will then be reset to ok. To see the new status you must refresh the Driver Monitor view with Refresh.
I
For detailed information on how to view and sort the SEL using
ServerView Operations Manager, refer to the "ServerView Operations
Manager - Server Management" user guide.
Viewing the SEL using the iRMC web frontend
Ê
Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê
Select the Event Log and choose the Internal Event Log submenu.
Ê
Under Internal Event Log Content the SEL is being displayed. In order to filter the list, select the check boxes next to the desired event types and press
Apply for the changes to take effect.
I
For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated
Remote Management Controller" user guide.
5.2.11.2 Clearing the SEL
You can clear the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView iRMC web frontend:
Ê
Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.
Ê
Select the Event Log and choose the Internal Event Log submenu.
Ê
Under Internal Event Log Information click Clear Internal Event Log to clear the
SEL.
I
For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated
Remote Management Controller" user guide.
5.2.12 Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment
In order to prevent errors caused by changing network device names (eth<x>), it is recommended to store the MAC address (hardware address) of a network interface card in the related NIC configuration file of the Linux OS.
92 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic software procedures
When replacing a network controller or the system board with onboard LAN controllers in a server running Linux OS, the MAC address will change but not automatically be updated in the definition file.
In order to prevent communication problems, it is necessary to update the changed MAC address stored in the related ifcfg-eth<x> definition file.
To update the MAC address, proceed as follows:
I
Procedures may differ depending on your Linux OS or the definition file on the client system. Use the following information as reference. Ask the system administrator to change the definition file.
Ê
After replacing a network controller or the system board, switch on and boot the server as described in section
"Switching on the server" on page 73 .
kudzu, the hardware configuration tool for Red Hat Linux, will launch at boot and detect the new and / or changed hardware on your system.
I
kudzu may not launch at boot depending on the client’s environment.
Ê
Select Keep Configuration and Ignore to complete the boot process.
Ê
Use the vi text editor to specify the MAC address in the HWADDR section of the ifcfg-eth<x> file:
I
The MAC address can be found on the type label attached to the system board or network controller.
Example:
In order to modify the definition file for network controller 1, enter the following command:
# vi /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth1
In vi, specify the new MAC address as follows:
HWADDR=xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
Ê
Save and close the definition file.
Ê
For the changes to take effect, you need to reboot the network by entering the following command:
# service network restart
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 93
Basic software procedures
I
If the system board or network controller offers multiple LAN ports, it is necessary to update the remaining ifcfg-eth<x> definition files accordingly.
Ê
Update the NIC configuration file to reflect the new card sequence and MAC address.
5.2.13 Enabling BitLocker functionality
If BitLocker Drive Encryption has been disabled for maintenance purposes (see section
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75 ), it has to be re-enabled
to complete the service task.
I
If BitLocker Drive Encryption has been disabled prior to replacing components you won't be asked for a recovery key when rebooting the server after the maintenance task. However, if BitLocker functionality has not been disabled, Windows will enter recovery mode and ask you to input recovery key for further booting.
Ê
In this case, ask the system administrator to enter the recovery key in order to boot the operating system.
Ê
Ask the system administrator to enable BitLocker-protection on the operating system drive, using the BitLocker setup wizard available either from the Control Panel or Windows Explorer.
Ê
Open Bitlocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking
Control Panel, clicking Security, and then clicking Bitlocker Drive
Encryption.
I
Administrator permission required: If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.
Ê
To enable a temporarily disabled BitLocker, click Turn On BitLocker.
Ê
Follow the instructions in the BitLocker Setup wizard.
I
For further information on how to enable BitLocker drive encryption, please refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base.
Fujitsu service partners will find additional information (also available in
Japanese) on the Fujitsu Extranet web pages.
94 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic software procedures
5.2.14 Performing a RAID array rebuild
After replacing a hard disk drive that has been combined into a RAID array,
RAID rebuild will be performed completely unattended as a background process.
Ê
Confirm that the RAID array rebuild has started normally and then complete the replacement procedure. (Check the progress bar that the status has proceeded at least 1%.)
Ê
Inform the customer of the approximated remaining time for rebuild to complete based on the displayed "Estimated time remaining" information.
Figure 21: Progress bar (RAID array rebuild)
V
CAUTION!
The system is now operational, however, data redundancy will not be available until the RAID array rebuild is complete. Depending on the hard disk drive capacity the overall process can take up to several hours, in some cases even days.
I
You may notice a slight performance impact during rebuild.
5.2.15 Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses
When replacing a network controller, the MAC (Media Access Control) and
WWN (World Wide Name) addresses will change.
I
In addition to the procedures described below, MAC / WWN addresses can also be found on the type label attached to a network controller or system board.
5.2.15.1 Looking up MAC addresses
Ê
Enter the BIOS.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 95
Basic software procedures
Ê
Depending on the number of network controllers in your system, you will find one or several Port Configuration menu items.
Use the arrow key ç to scroll to the right and browse all available tabs.
Each Port Configuration tab will display detailed information on the related network controller, including its MAC address.
Ê
Note down the new 12-digit MAC address.
Ê
Press [Esc] to exit the BIOS.
Ê
Inform the customer about the changed MAC address.
5.2.15.2 Looking up WWN addresses
Emulex FC / FCoE adapters
Ê
Enable the network controller’s Option ROM in the system board BIOS as described in section
"Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 85
.
Ê
Restart the server.
Ê
During boot, as soon as the Emulex BIOS utility option appears, press
[ALT] +[E] or [CTRL]+[E].
Ê
Under Emulex Adapters in the System you will find all available Emulex adapters and their WWN addresses.
Ê
Note down the new 16-digit WWN address.
Ê
Press [Esc] to exit the Emulex BIOS utility.
Ê
Inform the customer about the changed WWN address.
QLogic FC adapters
Ê
Enable the network controller’s Option ROM in the system board BIOS as described in section
"Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 85
.
Ê
Restart the server.
Ê
During boot, as soon as the QLogic BIOS utility option appears, press
[ALT]
+[Q] or [CTRL]+[Q].
Ê
Under Select Host Adapter use the arrow keys æ/Ë to select the desired
FC / FCoE adapter and press [Enter].
96 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic software procedures
Ê
From the Fast!UTIL Options menu, select Configuration Settings, and press
[Enter] .
Ê
From the Configuration Settings menu, select Adapter Settings, and press
[Enter] .
Ê
Note down the new 16-digit WWN address found under Adapter Port Name.
Ê
Press [Esc] to return to the main menu and exit the QLogic BIOS utility.
Ê
Inform the customer about the changed WWN address.
5.2.16 Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool
The Chassis ID EPROM located on a dedicated Chassis ID board or on your server’s front panel board contains system information like server name and model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.
In order to integrate your system into the ServerView management environment and to enable server installation using the ServerView Installation Manager, system data needs to be complete and correct.
After replacing the Chassis ID EPROM, system information has to be entered using the Chassis ID Prom tool. The tool and further instructions are available to maintenance personnel from the Fujitsu Technology Solutions Extranet: https://partners.ts.fujitsu.com/com/service/ps/Servers/PRIMERGY/
Ê
Select your PRIMERGY system from the main area of the page.
Ê
From the categories selection, choose Software & Tools Documentation.
Ê
In the Tools area click Tools: Chassis-IDProm Tool to download the file
(tool-chassis-Idprom-Tool.zip).
I
For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.
5.2.17 Configuring LAN teaming
Use ServerView Operations Manager to obtain detailed information on existing
LAN teams:
Ê
In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select System Status from the Information / Operation menu.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 97
Basic software procedures
Ê
Under Network Interfaces select LAN Teaming.
Ê
The Network Interfaces (Summary) overview shows all configured LAN teams and their components. Choose a LAN team to display further details:
– LAN Team Properties: Properties of the selected LAN team
– LAN Team Statistics: Available statistics about the selected LAN team
I
For more detailed information, refer to the "ServerView Operations
Manager - Server Management" user guide.
5.2.17.1 After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers
Please note when re-using a replaced LAN controller:
Ê
Confirm with the customer whether the LAN controller you have replaced has been used as part of a LAN teaming configuration.
Ê
If LAN teaming has been active, you will need to restore the configuration using the LAN driver utility after replacing the LAN controller.
Ensure that the controllers have been assigned as primary or secondary according to your requirements.
I
For details, refer to the relevant LAN driver manual.
5.2.17.2 After replacing the system board
Ê
Confirm with the customer whether the onboard LAN controller you have replaced has been used as part of a LAN teaming configuration.
Ê
If LAN teaming has been active, you will need to restore the configuration using the LAN driver utility after replacing the system board.
I
For details, refer to the relevant LAN driver manual.
5.2.18 Switching off the ID indicator
Press the ID button on the front panel or use ServerView Operations Manager to switch off the ID indicator after the maintenance task has been concluded successfully.
98 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Basic software procedures
I
For further information, refer to section "Locating the defective server" on page 51
or to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual.
Using the ID button on the front panel
Ê
Press the ID button on the front panel to switch off the ID indicators.
Using ServerView Operations Manager
Ê
In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View and press the Locate button in the title bar to switch off the ID indicator.
5.2.19 Performing a fan test after replacing a defective fan
After replacing a defective system fan or power supply unit containing a defective fan, the fan error indicators will stay lit until the next fan test. By default, a fan test is automatically started every 24 hours. The first automatic fan test being performed after replacing a fan will turn off the fan error indicator.
If you want to start the fan test manually, you can do so by following the description below:
Executing the fan test via the iRMC Web interface
Ê
Log into the iRMC web interface.
Ê
Under Sensors select Fans.
Ê
Select the replaced fan in the system fans group and click Start Fan Test.
I
For more detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the
"iRMC S2/S3 - integrated Remote Management Controller" user guide.
Executing the fan test via ServerView Operations Manager
Ê
Open the ServerView Operations Manager and log in.
Ê
Under Administration select Server Configuration.
Ê
In the hierarchy tree of the Server list tab, select the server to be configured.
Ê
In the right-hand side of the window, specify the details on the selected server and confirm your entries by clicking GO....
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 99
Basic software procedures
In the left-hand section of the window, the Configuration tab is being activated.
Ê
In the navigation area of the Configuration tab, select Other Settings.
Ê
Under Daily Fan Test, set the daily fan test time to a few minutes from the current time. (Ensure to note down your previous setting.)
Ê
Click Save Page.
The fan test will be started at the specified time.
Ê
After the fan test is complete, restore the time setting to its initial value and click Save Page.
I
For more detailed information, refer to the "ServerView Operations
Manager" user guide.
For the Japanese market: Executing the fan test via Chassis ID Prom Tool
Ê
Prepare a boot medium (CD) containing the Chassis ID Prom Tool.
Ê
Insert the CD into the DVD drive and close the drive tray.
Ê
Shut down and restart the server.
The server will boot from the Chassis ID Prom Tool medium.
Ê
After the boot process is complete, press [ESC] to enter the command prompt screen.
Ê
Enter IPMIVIEW.EXE and press [Enter] to start the IPMI Tool.
Ê
Under System Specific Functions select Fan Test and press the [F9] function key to start the fan test.
100 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
6 Power supply
Safety notes
V
CAUTION!
● Do not disassemble the power supply unit. Doing so may cause electric shock.
●
●
Areas around the power supply unit may remain extremely hot after shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to cool down before removing the power supply unit.
When installing the power supply unit, be sure to confirm that the connector of the power supply unit is not damaged or bent.
●
●
●
●
Do not insert your hands in the power supply unit slot when removing the power supply unit. Doing so may cause electric shock.
If the power supply unit is hard to remove, do not pull out it by force.
The power supply unit is heavy, so handle it carefully. If you drop it by mistake, injuries may result.
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
6.1
Basic information
In its basic configuration, the server has one power supply module that adjusts automatically to any mains voltage in the range of 100 V - 240 V. Besides the power supply module, a second power supply module can be installed optionally to serve as a redundant power supply. If one power supply module fails, the second power supply module in the redundant configuration ensures operation can continue uninterrupted.
There are two types of power supply modules available:
– 450W power supply module
– 800W power supply module
6.1.1
General equipping rules
Both power supply modules must be of the same type.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 101
Power supply
6.2
Installing a power supply module
Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
6.2.1
Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
6.2.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
6.2.3
Removing the dummy cover
Figure 22: Removing the dummy cover
Ê
Press the two grips together as indicated by the arrows (1) and remove the dummy cover (2).
102 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Power supply
V
CAUTION!
Keep the dummy cover for future use. If the power supply module is removed and not replaced with a new one, the dummy cover must be reinstalled due to cooling, to comply with applicable EMC regulations
(regulations on electromagnetic compatibility), and to protect against fire.
6.2.4
Installing the power supply module
Figure 23: Unlocking the power supply module
Ê
Push the handle of the power supply module halfway upward in the direction of the arrow.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 103
Power supply
Figure 24: Installing the power supply module
Ê
Carefully push the power supply module into the empty bay (1) until it stops.
Ê
Push the handle of the power supply module as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow (2).
I
Make sure that the power supply module engages correctly in the bay and is locked in position. This is the only way to prevent the power supply module from sliding out of its bay and being damaged during transportation.
Figure 25: Installing the cable clamp
Ê
Push the cable clamp into the corresponding hole until it clicks in.
104 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
6.2.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Connecting the power cord" on page 72
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
6.3
Removing a power supply module
Power supply
Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
Note for servers using CMA (Cable Management Arm)
Regarding of removing power supply modules, additional tasks are needed, due to an interference between CMA stopper and the power supply modules.
Figure 26: Unlocking the CMA stopper
Ê
Push the lock spring inward to unlock the CMA stopper.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 105
Power supply
Figure 27: Removing the CMA stopper
Ê
Remove the CMA stopper with the mounted crossbar.
Ê
Hold the CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA including cables in the right hand.
Figure 28: Removing the power supply module
Ê
Remove the power supply module and install the dummy cover carefully.
Ê
Mount the complete assembly (CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA) again into the rail.
106 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
6.3.1
Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
6.3.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 56
I
Keep the power cord for future use.
6.3.3
Removing the power supply module
Power supply
Figure 29: Unlocking and removing the power supply module
Ê
Push the handle of the power supply module halfway upward in the direction of the arrow (1).
Ê
Push the lock in direction of the arrow (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 107
Power supply
Ê
Grip the handle and pull out the power supply module in the direction of the arrow (3).
V
CAUTION!
Never leave the bay for the power supply module empty for more than two minutes during operation. Otherwise, excessive temperatures could damage system components.
6.3.4
Installing the dummy cover
Figure 30: Installing the dummy cover
Ê
Push the dummy cover into the right bay until it clicks into place.
Ensure that the marking "TOP" is right and the upper rear cant of the dummy cover fits under the PSU cage.
6.3.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
108 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
6.4
Replacing a power supply module
Power supply
Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
V
CAUTION!
● When replacing a power supply module in a non-redundant configuration, the server must be switched off first.
●
●
Replace the power supply module after specifying the one that breaks down at work by revitalization.
Both power supply modules must be of the same type.
Note for servers using CMA (Cable Management Arm)
Regarding of replacing power supply modules, additional tasks are needed, due to an interference between CMA stopper and the power supply modules.
Ê
Push the lock spring inward to unlock the CMA stopper (see figure
).
Ê
Remove the CMA stopper with the mounted crossbar (see figure 27
).
Ê
Hold the CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA arm including cables in the right hand.
Ê
Remove the power supply module (see figure 28 ) and install the new power
supply module carefully.
Ê
Mount the complete assembly (CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA arm) again into the rail.
6.4.1
Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 109
Power supply
6.4.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
Only when replacing a power supply module in a non-redundant configuration:
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective component" on page 54
Ê
Check which power supply module is defective.
A power supply module is defective when the indicator on the PSU module lights up orange.
I
For more information see section
"Power supply modules" on page 393 .
6.4.3
Removing the defective power supply module
Ê
Remove the power supply module as described in section
"Removing the power supply module" on page 107 .
6.4.4
Installing the new power supply module
Ê
6.4.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Connecting the power cord" on page 72
Ê
Only when replacing a power supply module in a non-redundant configuration:
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Performing a fan test after replacing a defective fan" on page 99
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
110 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Power supply
6.5
Replacing the power distribution board
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Average task duration: 15 minutes
6.5.1
Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
6.5.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 111
Power supply
6.5.3
Removing the defective power distribution board
Ê
Figure 31: Disconnecting the power cables
Ê
Disconnect the two power cables from the connector "PWR 1" (1) and connector "PWR 2" (2) of the system board.
Figure 32: Removing the screws
Ê
Remove the two screws (see circles).
112 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Power supply
Figure 33: Removing the power distribution board
Ê
Pull the power distribution board in direction of the arrow (1).
Ê
Remove the power distribution board upward (2).
6.5.4
Installing the new power distribution board
Figure 34: Position bolts
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 113
Power supply
Figure 35: Installing the power distribution board
Ê
Position the power distribution board on the two bolts (see circles in figure
Ê
Push the power distribution board in the direction of the arrow (2).
Figure 36: Fastening the power distribution board
Ê
Fasten the power distribution board with the two screws (see circles).
114 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Power supply
Figure 37: Connecting the power cables
Ê
Connect the two power cables to the connector "PWR 2" (1) and connector
"PWR 1" (2) of the system board.
Ê
Install all power supply modules you removed beforehand as described in section
"Installing the power supply module" on page 103 .
6.5.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 115
Power supply
116 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
7 Hard disk drives / solid state drives
Safety notes
V
CAUTION!
● The hard disk drive or solid state drive must not be removed from the installation frame by anyone except a service technician.
●
●
●
The HDD/SSD modules (drives) must all be marked clearly so that they can be put back in their original places after an upgrade. If this is not done, existing data can be lost.
The hot-plug function is only possible in conjunction with a corresponding RAID configuration.
Further information about the RAID configuration or RAID level can be found in the RAID controller documentation.
Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas or the edges of the circuit boards.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Before removing the unit, wait for about 30 seconds until the disk stops spinning completely.
When a hard disk drive is starting up, a resonant noise may be audible for a short while. This does not indicate a failure.
Depending on the OS, you can configure the write cache settings for the hard disk drives. If a power failure should occur while the write cache is enabled, cached data may be lost.
When disposing of, transferring, or returning a hard disk drive or solid state drive, wipe out the data on the drive for your own security.
Rough handling of hard disk drives may damage the stored data. To cope with any unexpected problems, always back up important data.
When backing up data to another hard disk drive, you should make backups on a file or partition basis.
Be careful not to hit the hard disk drive or bring it into contact with metallic objects.
Handle the device on a shock and vibration free surface.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 117
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
●
●
● Do not use the device in extremely hot or cold locations, or locations with extreme temperature changes.
Never attempt to disassemble the hard disk drive or solid state drive.
Follow the safety instructions in chapter
"Important information" on page 39 .
7.1
Basic information
The hard disk drives or solid state drives which can be ordered for the
PRIMERGY RX200 S7 are supplied already mounted in an installation frame so that defective drives can be replaced and new drives can be added during operation. The hard disk drive or solid state drive and the installation frame together make up the HDD module or SSD module.
The server is shipped with one of the following configurations:
– configuration with up to four HDD/SSD modules and optional ODD
– configuration with up to eight HDD/SSD modules
Each HDD/SSD module can accommodate a SAS/SATA hard disk drive or
SATA solid state drive with a 2.5-inch format. The HDD/SSD modules are connected to the HDD backplane wirelessly. This allows HDD/SSD modules to be plugged in or pulled out easily. If the server has a corresponding RAID configuration, defective HDD/SSD modules can also be replaced during operation.
Hybrid configurations of SAS and SATA HDD/SSD modules are not supported.
I
For information on RAID controllers controlling the HDD/SSD modules see chapter
"Expansion cards and backup units" on page 151
.
7.1.1
General equipping rules
– Solid state drives (SSDs) are always equipped before installing hard disk drives.
– If only one HDD/SSD module is installed, the HDD/SSD module will be installed in position 1. Free bays must be equipped with a dummy module.
118 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.1.2
Configuration with up to four HDD/SSD modules
Figure 38: Equipping the four HDD/SSD bays
SAS connectivity
Controller
SAS controller in slot 4
Channel
1
Connection
Drives 1, 2, 3, 4
HDD/SSD naming scheme
I
The HDD/SSD numbering as listed in the ServerView RAID Manager differs from the HDD/SSD mounting order:
Bay
1
3
RAID
Manager
#
[0]
[2]
Channel
2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs log.
Drive #
Bay
RAID
Manager
#
1
1
0
2
2
4
[1]
[3]
Table 4: HDD naming scheme
Channel
1
1 log.
Drive #
1
3
7.1.3
Configuration with up to eight HDD/SSD modules
Figure 39: Equipping the eight HDD/SSD bays
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 119
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
SAS connectivity
Controller
SAS controller in slot 4
Channel
1
2
Connection
Drives 1, 2, 3, 4
Drives 5, 6, 7, 8
HDD/SSD naming scheme
I
The HDD/SSD numbering as listed in the ServerView RAID Manager differs from the HDD/SSD mounting order:
Bay
5
7
1
3
RAID
Manager
#
[0]
[2]
[4]
[6]
Channel
2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs log.
Drive #
Bay
RAID
Manager
#
2
2
1
1
0
2
4
6
2
4
6
8
[1]
[3]
[5]
[7]
Table 5: HDD naming scheme
Channel
1
1
2
2 log.
Drive #
1
3
5
7
7.2
Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module
Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
7.2.1
Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
120 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.2.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
7.2.3
Removing the 2.5-inch dummy module
I
Dummy modules protect free bays against environmental impact.
Remove the dummy module before installing an additional HDD/SSD module.
0
0
1
Figure 40: Removing the 2.5-inch dummy module
Ê
Press both tabs on the dummy module together until the locking mechanism disengages (1).
Ê
Pull the dummy module out of the bay (2).
V
CAUTION!
Store the dummy module in a safe place. If you have removed an
HDD/SSD module and do not install a new one in its place, put the dummy module back in its place for cooling, to comply with EMC regulations (regulations regarding electromagnetic compatibility), and for protection against fire. Ensure that the dummy module engages correctly in the bay.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 121
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.2.4
Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module
/
/
0
Figure 41: Unlocking the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module
Ê
Release the locking mechanism as follows:
1. Press the two green tabs of the locking lever together (1).
2. Push the handle of the HDD/SSD module fully in the direction of the arrow (2). The HDD/SSD module is now unlocked.
Figure 42: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module
Ê
Carefully push the HDD/SSD module into the empty bay (1) until it stops.
Ê
Push the handle completely (2) in the direction of the arrow until the locking mechanism engages.
122 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.2.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
Ê
"Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 95
7.3
Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module
Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
V
Only applicable for removing non-defective HDD/SSD modules:
Ê
Set the drive to "Offline" via the software (RAID controller configuration software), before removing an HDD/SSD module that is not defective.
7.3.1
Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
7.3.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
Ensure that the HDD/SSD module to be removed is not combined into a
RAID array. If the drive is part of a RAID array, you first need to delete the array using ServerView RAID Manager.
V
CAUTION!
All data on all HDDs/SSDs in the array will be lost! Be sure to back up your data before deleting a RAID array.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 123
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
I
For further information, please refer to the "ServerView Suite RAID
Management" user guide, available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
or from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server.
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
7.3.3
Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module
/
/
0
Figure 43: Unlocking the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module
Ê
Release the locking mechanism as follows:
1. Press the two green tabs of the locking lever together (1).
2. Push the handle of the HDD/SSD module fully in the direction of the arrow (2). The HDD/SSD module is now unlocked.
Ê
Pull the HDD/SSD module out a few centimeters.
Ê
Wait for at least 30 seconds.
I
This is not necessary when removing a solid state drive.
I
This period is necessary for the RAID controller to recognize that an
HDD module has been removed and for the hard disk drive to come to a stop.
Ê
Pull the HDD/SSD module out completely.
124 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.3.4
Installing the 2.5-inch dummy module
Figure 44: Installing the 2.5-inch dummy module
Ê
Push the dummy module into the empty bay until it engages.
7.3.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 125
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.4
Replacing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module
Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
V
CAUTION!
● Only remove an HDD/SSD module during operation if the drive is not currently being accessed. Observe the indicators for the corresponding HDD/SSD modules, see "RX200 S7 Server -
Operating Manual".
● Under no circumstances should you remove an HDD/SSD module while the system is in operation if you are not sure that the drive is operated by a RAID controller and belongs to a disk array that is operating in RAID level 1, 1E, 10, 5, 50, 6 or 60.
An HDD/SSD module can only be replaced during operation in conjunction with a corresponding RAID configuration.
● All HDD/SSD modules (drives) must be uniquely identified so that they can be reinstalled in their original bays later. If this is not done, existing data can be lost.
V
Only applicable for removing non-defective HDD/SSD modules:
Ê
Set the drive to "Offline" via the software (RAID controller configuration software), before removing an HDD/SSD module that is not defective.
7.4.1
Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
126 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.4.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Locating the defective component" on page 54
7.4.3
Removing the defective 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module
Ê
Remove the HDD/SSD module as described in section
"Removing the 2.5inch HDD/SSD module" on page 124
.
7.4.4
Installing the new 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module
Ê
Install the HDD/SSD module as described in section "Installing the 2.5-inch
.
7.4.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
Ê
"Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 95
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 127
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.5
Replacing the 4xHDD backplane
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Average task duration: 10 minutes
Note on modified hardware
I
In newer systems you will find a modified 4xHDD backplane. Connector
"CN1" (see circle) is moved somewhat to the left side.
Figure 45: Modified 4xHDD backplane
I
In newer systems the SAS/SATA data cable is available as a flat cable.
Figure 46: Modified SAS/SATA data cable
128 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.5.1
Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
7.5.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
7.5.3
Removing the defective 4xHDD backplane
Ê
Release all HDD/SSD modules and pull them out a few centimeters, see section
"Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 124
I
The HDD/SSD modules need not to be removed. But if you want to remove them nevertheless, check if all HDD/SSD modules are uniquely identified so that you can reinsert them into their original bays.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 129
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
Figure 47: Disconnecting the cables from the 4xHDD backplane
Ê
Disconnect the following cables from the 4xHDD backplane:
– (1) SAS/SATA data cable from connector "CN1"
– (2) power cable from connector "CN20"
– (3) OOB cable from connector "CN14" (if applicable)
– (4) ODD cable from connector "CN18"
For the cable plan see section
.
130 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
Figure 48: Removing the 4xHDD backplane
Ê
Pull the 4xHDD backplane upward until the lower cant gets out of the guides
(see close-up).
Ê
Take the 4xHDD backplane from the hooks.
7.5.4
Installing the new 4xHDD backplane
Figure 49: Installing the 4xHDD backplane
Ê
Position the 4xHDD backplane on the hooks.
Ê
Push the 4xHDD backplane downward. Make sure that the lower cant of the
4xHDD backplane fits in the guides (see close-up).
V
CAUTION!
Ensure that none of the cables are strained or damaged!
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 131
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
Ê
Connect the cables to the 4xHDD backplane as shown in figure
– (1) SAS/SATA data cable to connector "CN1"
– (2) power cable to connector "CN20"
– (3) OOB cable to connector "CN14" (if applicable)
– (4) ODD cable to connector "CN18"
Ê
Insert all HDD/SSD modules, see section
"Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 122 .
I
Make sure that you reinstall the HDD/SSD module in the bay it was located before the 4xHDD backplane replacement.
7.5.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
132 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.6
Replacing the 8xHDD backplane
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Average task duration: 10 minutes
7.6.1
Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
7.6.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the air duct" on page 63
7.6.3
Removing the defective 8xHDD backplane
Ê
Release all HDD/SSD modules and pull them out a few centimeters, see section
"Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 124
I
The HDD/SSD modules need not to be removed. But if you want to remove them nevertheless, check if all HDD/SSD modules are uniquely identified so that you can reinsert them into their original bays.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 133
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
Figure 50: Disconnecting cables from the 8xHDDbackplane
Ê
Disconnect the following cables from the 8xHDD backplane:
– (1) SAS data cable channel A from connector "CN1"
– (2) power cable from connector "CN20"
– (3) OOB cable from connector "CN14" (if applicable)
Ê
Disconnect the SAS data cable (4) from the RAID controller connector
"MLC1".
For the cable plan see section
.
Ê
Remove all fan modules as described in section
"Removing the defective fan module" on page 148 .
I
Check if all fan modules are uniquely identified so that you can reinsert them into their original bays.
134 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
Figure 51: Removing the fan cage
Ê
Remove the four screws (1).
Ê
Push the fan cage somewhat in direction of the arrow (2) to disengage the hooks (see close-up).
Ê
Remove the fan cage upward (3).
Figure 52: Removing the 8xHDD backplane
Ê
Pull the 8xHDD backplane upward until the lower cant gets out of the guides
(see close-up).
Ê
Take the 8xHDD backplane from the hooks.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 135
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
Figure 53: Disconnecting the SAS data cable from the 8xHDDbackplane
Ê
Disconnect the SAS data cable from the 8xHDD backplane:
– (1-4) SAS data cable connector P1 - P2 from the corresponding connectors
– (5) SGPIO connector from connector "CN8"
For the cable plan see section
.
7.6.4
Installing the new 8xHDD backplane
Ê
Connect the SAS data cable to the 8xHDD backplane as shown in figure 53
.
Figure 54: Installing the 8xHDD backplane
Ê
Position the 8xHDD backplane on the hooks.
Ê
Push the 8xHDD backplane downward. Make sure that the lower cant of the
8xHDD backplane fits in the guides (see close-up).
V
CAUTION!
Ensure that none of the cables are strained or damaged!
136 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
Figure 55: Installing the fan cage
Ê
Insert the fan cage (1).
Ê
Push the fan cage somewhat in direction of the arrow (2) to engage the hooks (see close-up).
Ê
Fasten fan cage with the four screws (3).
Ê
Install all fan modules as described in section "Installing the new fan module" on page 148 .
I
Make sure that you reinstall the fan module in the bay it was located before the 8xHDD backplane replacement.
Ê
Connect the cables to the 8xHDD backplane as shown in figure 50
.
– (1) SAS data cable channel A to connector "CN1"
– (2) power cable to connector "CN20"
– (3) OOB cable to connector "CN14" (if applicable)
Ê
Insert all HDD/SSD modules, see section "Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 122
.
I
Make sure that you reinstall the HDD/SSD module in the bay it was located before the 8xHDD backplane replacement.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 137
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.6.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the air duct" on page 63
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
138 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.7
Converting to configuration up to eight
HDD/SSD modules
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 15 minutes
7.7.1
Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps:
– Replacing the cage: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
7.7.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the air duct" on page 63
7.7.3
Removing the 4xHDD backplane
Ê
Remove the 4xHDD backplane as described in section
"Removing the defective 4xHDD backplane" on page 129
.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 139
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.7.4
Removing the ODD cable and ODD cage
Ê
If applicable, remove the ODD from its bay.
Figure 56: Removing the ODD cable
Ê
Disconnect the ODD cable from the connector "SATA 1" on the system board (see circle).
140 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
Figure 57: Removing the screw
Ê
Remove the screw (see circle).
Figure 58: Removing the ODD cage
Ê
Remove the ODD cage frontward.
Ê
Thread the ODD cable through the opening.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 141
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
7.7.5
Installing the 2xHDD cage
Figure 59: Installing the 2xHDD cage
Ê
Push the 2xHDD cage as far as possible in the bay.
Figure 60: Fastening the 2x HDD cage
Ê
Fasten the 2xHDD cage with the screw (see circle).
7.7.6
Installing the 8xHDD backplane
Ê
Remove the fan cage as described in section "Removing the defective
8xHDD backplane" on page 133 .
142 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
Ê
If applicable, install a 2-channel RAID controller as described in section
"Installing an expansion card in riser module 3" on page 177 .
Ê
Install the 8xHDD backplane as described in section
.
7.7.7
Installing the HDD/SSD modules
Figure 61: Removing the HDD locks
Ê
Pull out the two HDD locks frontward.
Ê
Remove the two dummy modules as described in section
2.5-inch dummy module" on page 121 .
Ê
Install the HDD/SSD modules, see section "Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 122
.
I
Make sure that you install the HDD/SSD modules in the sequence described in section
"Configuration with up to eight HDD/SSD modules" on page 119 .
7.7.8
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the air duct" on page 63
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 143
Hard disk drives / solid state drives
144 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
8 Fans
Safety notes
V
CAUTION!
● Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices.Doing so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.
● Devices inside the server remain hot after shutdown. Wait for a while after shutdown before installing or removing internal options.
●
●
●
●
●
The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. Before handling them, first touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity from your body.
Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas or the edges of the circuit boards.
If devices are installed or disassembled using methods other than those outlined in this chapter, the warranty will be invalidated.
The installation indicated on this note is sometimes changed to the kind of possible options without notice.
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 145
Fans
8.1
Basic information
Base units are supplied with four hot-plug fan modules (single CPU configuration and depending on CPU type) or six hot-plug fan modules (two
CPUs configuration and depending on CPU type). Each fan module consists of two fans, implemented in one housing.
Base units with four fan modules operate in a 1 of 4 redundancy, base units with six fan modules operate in a 1 of 6 redundancy. In other words, if one of the four or six fan modules fails, the system will operate without any problem.
PWR 2
PWR 1
Front
Panel
SATA 1
FAN 11/12 SYS
K
FAN
11/12
PCH
Slot riser card / slot 4
CPU 2 DIMM 1E
CPU 2 DIMM 2E
CPU 2 DIMM 3E
CPU 2 DIMM 1F
CPU 2 DIMM 2F
CPU 2 DIMM 3F
SAS 1
BP
PWR
Front LAN M
SMB
SAS
FAN 9/10 SYS
K
FAN
9/10
CPU 2
FAN 7/8 SYS
FAN 5/6 SYS
K
CPU 2 DIMM 3H
CPU 2 DIMM 2H
CPU 2 DIMM 1H
CPU 2 DIMM 3G
CPU 2 DIMM 2G
CPU 2 DIMM 1G
INDICATE
CSS
Battery
FAN 3/4 SYS
K
FAN 1/2 SYS
K
K
FAN
7/8
FAN
5/6
FAN
3/4
FAN
1/2
Figure 62: Numbering of the fan modules
146 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
8.2
Replacing a fan module
Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)
Average task duration: 10 minutes
8.2.1
Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
8.2.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Extending the server out of the rack" on page 57
Ê
"Removing the fan cover" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the housing cover" on page 60
(if applicable)
Ê
"Removing the air duct" on page 63
(if applicable)
Ê
"Locating the defective component" on page 54
Fans
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 147
Fans
8.2.3
Removing the defective fan module
Figure 63: Removing the fan module
Ê
Take out the fan module upward.
8.2.4
Installing the new fan module
A
Figure 64: Installing the fan module
Ê
Insert the fan module (1).
Ê
First press down the rubber pins on the connector side (A), until they engage
(2).
Ê
Then press down the rubber pins on the opposite side, until they engage (3).
148 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Fans
8.2.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the air duct" on page 63
(if applicable)
Ê
"Installing the housing cover" on page 67
(if applicable)
Ê
"Installing the fan cover" on page 68
Ê
"Sliding the server into the rack" on page 71
Ê
"Performing a fan test after replacing a defective fan" on page 99
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
I
When a fan module fails, the remaining fan modules will start operating at full speed. After the defective fan module has been replaced, all fan modules will continue to run at full speed for a couple of minutes, before resetting to a lower speed.
Ensure that all fan modules reset to a normal operating speed.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 149
Fans
150 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
9 Expansion cards and backup units
Safety notes
V
CAUTION!
● Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.
●
●
●
Devices and components inside the server remain hot after shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to cool down before installing or removing internal options.
Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up
(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostaticsensitive devices (ESDs).
Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit boards by their metallic areas or edges.
●
●
If devices are installed or disassembled using methods other than those outlined in this chapter, the warranty will be invalidated.
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 151
Expansion cards and backup units
9.1
Basic information
With three riser modules, the system offers four PCIe slots.
Figure 65: Numbering of the riser modules
1 Riser module 1 offers slot 1
2 Riser module 2 offers slot 2 and slot 3
3 Riser module 3 offers slot 4
Slot no.
Description
Slot 1
Slot 2
PCIe-2 x16, low profile, half length
PCIe-2 x8, low profile, half length
Slot 3
Slot 4
PCIe-2 x8, low profile, half length
PCIe-2 x8, low profile, half length, modular RAID controller only
152 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.1.1
Equipping the PCIe slots
Ê
Slot 4 is reserved for modular RAID controller only.
PCI bus type
Max pcs per system
Slot no
1 2
Controller for special slots
S26361-F3610-E702 upgrade kit to 4x Gbit LAN in-built
D2735-A100
S26361-F3611-E701 upgrade kit to 6x Gbit LAN in-built
D2745-A100
S26361-F3629-E702 upgrade kit to 2xGbit+2x10Gbit
LAN in-built
D2755-A100
S26361-F3740-E701 upgrade kit to 4xGbit onboard
D3035
S26361-F3739-E701 upgrade kit to 6xGbit onboard
D3045
S26361-F3554-E8 based on LSI2008
S26361-D2607-A**
S26361-F3554-E512 based on LSI2108
S26361-D2616-A**
S26361-F3669-E1 based on LSI2208
S26361-D3116-A**
PCI Express x16 controller
S26361-F4533-E102/E202
IB HCA 56Gb 1 and 2 port
1 1)
1
1)
1
1)
1 1)
1
1)
1
1
1
1
2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
3 4
Forbidden slot
-
-
-
-
-
1 1, 2, 3
1 1, 2, 3
1 1, 2, 3
-
1, 3, 4
1, 3, 4
1, 3, 4
1, 3, 4
1, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
1)
Max 1x in common
2)
No mix and match of different IB HCA QDR and IB HCA FDR / IB HCA QDR enh. possible
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 153
Expansion cards and backup units
PCI Express x8 controller
S26361-F3629-E202
10 Gigabit Ethernet contr. dual port
D2755
S26361-F3713-E202
LSI MegaRAID
SAS 9285CV-8e
S26361-F3592-E201
Emulex OCe10102
S26361-F3631-E201
QLE2560
S26361-F3631-E202
QLE2562
S26361-F4475-E103
IB HCA 1x 40Gb
PCIe 3.0 (8.0GT/s)
S26361-F4475-E203
IB HCA 2x 40Gb
PCIe 3.0 (8.0GT/s)
S26361-F4475-E102
IB HCA 1x 40Gb
S26361-F4475-E202
IB HCA 2x 40Gb
S26361-F3752-E202
Eth Ctrl X540-T2
PCI bus type
Max pcs per system
Slot no
1 2
3
2
2
3
3
2
1)
1)
2) 3)
2
2) 3)
2
2
2
2)
2)
3)
3)
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
3
3 -
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Forbidden slot
4
1, 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1)
No mix and match of different FC controllers possible. Max. 3x in common
2)
Max. 2x in common
3)
No mix and match of different IB HCA QDR and IB HCA FDR / IB HCA QDR enh. possible
154 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
PCI bus type
Max pcs per system
Slot no
1 2
PCI Express x4 controller
S26361-F3610-E202
2x1Gbit D2735-2 Cu lp
S26361-F3611-E201
4x1Gbit D2745
Barton Hills based
S26361-F3740-E201
ETH CTRL 2X1GB CU
D3035
3
3
3
S26361-F3739-E201
ETH CTRL 4X1GB CU
D3045
S26361-F3242-E201
Intel PRO/1000 PF Server Adapter
(Sheepshead Bay)
S26361-F3961-E201
Emulex LPe 1250
S26361-F3961-E202
Emulex LPe 12002
3
4 GB/s 3
3
3
1)
1)
1 S26361-F3593-E201
MegaRAID SAS9280-8e 6Gb/s
WASAT
ASC 29320L PE
S26361-F3628-E201
SAS Controller 6Gb/s 8 port
LSI SAS9200-8e
S26361-F3271-E201
LSI SAS3442E-R Low Profile
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
3
1
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
3
1
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4
4
1, 4
4
4
4
4
Forbidden slot
4
4
4
4
1)
No mix and match of different FC controllers possible. Max. 3x in common
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 155
Expansion cards and backup units
PCI Express x4 controller
S26361-F4522-E321
PCIe-SSD 320GB MLC ioDrive 320GB
S26361-F4522-E641
PCIe-SSD 640GB MLC ioDrive 640GB
S26361-F4522-E781
PCIe-SSD 781GB MLC ioDrive 781GB
S26361-F4522-E121
PCIe-SSD 1.2TB MLC ioDrive 1.2TB
PCI Express x1 controller
S26361-F3516-E201
Intel® Gigabit CT Desktop Adapter
(Shelter Island)
S26361-F2748-E637
Nvidia NVS300
S26361-F3749-Exxx
USB3.0 PCIe x1 adapter card
Miscellaneous
S26361-F3120-E3
Serial Port Option
PCI bus type
Max pcs per system
Slot no
1 2
1
1) 2)
1
1) 2)
1 1) 2)
1
1) 2)
3
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
2
-
1
2
3 4
2 -
2
2
2
3
2
2
3
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Forbidden slot
1, 4
1, 4
1, 4
1, 4
4
2, 4
1, 4
4
1)
Max. 1x in common
2)
No mix. of any PCIe SSD possible
I
For the installing order see the configurator provided for the RX200 S7: http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.html
(for the EMEA market) http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/ for the Japanese market
156 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.2
Additional tasks
You have to install expansion card slot brackets or SFP+ transceiver modules for some expansion cards.
9.2.1
Installing expansion card slot brackets
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
9.2.1.1
Required tools
● Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
9.2.1.2
Installing an expansion card slot bracket
Ê
Place the controller on the mounting tabs on the slot bracket.
Ê
Fasten the slot bracket to the controller with two M3 x 4.5 mm screws.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 157
Expansion cards and backup units
I
Use the low profile bracket perforated for the ModularRAID controllers based on LSI MegaRAID.
Figure 66: Perforated and non-perforated slot brackets
1
2
3
Full height bracket non-perforated
Full height bracket perforated
Low profile bracket perforated
I
For examples see the next sections.
158 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Network adapter D2735
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 67: Placing the slot bracket - D2735
Ê
Place the controller on the mounting tabs on the slot bracket (1).
Ê
Carefully shift the slot bracket towards the controller (2) until the plug shells engage with the cut-outs in the slot bracket connector panel (see circle).
Figure 68: Fastening the slot bracket - D2735
Ê
Fasten the slot bracket to the controller with two M3 x 4.5 mm screws.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 159
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 69: Assembled network adapter D2735
Network adapter D2745
Figure 70: Placing the slot bracket - D2745
Ê
Hinge the slot bracket to the plug shell as shown (1).
Ê
Fold the slot bracket towards the controller until the threaded mounting tab is aligned with the screw hole on the controller (2).
160 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 71: Fastening the slot bracket - D2745
Ê
Fasten the slot bracket to the controller with one M3 x 4.5 mm screw.
Figure 72: Assembled network adapter D2745
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 161
Expansion cards and backup units
Network adapter D2755
Figure 73: Placing the slot bracket - D2755
Ê
Place the controller on the mounting tabs on the slot bracket (1).
Ê
Carefully shift the slot bracket towards the controller until the plug shells engage with the cut-outs in the slot bracket connector panel (2).
Ê
Ensure that the ESD springs on the plug shells properly engage with the slot bracket as shown (see circles).
162 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 74: Fastening the slot bracket - D2755
Ê
Fasten the slot bracket to the controller with two M3 x 4.5 mm screws.
Figure 75: Assembled network adapter D2755
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 163
Expansion cards and backup units
9.2.2
Installing SFP+ transceiver modules
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
9.2.2.1
Required tools
● Tool-less
9.2.2.2
Installing the first SFP+ transceiver module
Figure 76: Removing the protective optical port plug
Ê
Remove the SFP+ transceiver module from its protective packaging.
Ê
Remove the optical port plug from the new / additional SFP+ transceiver module.
V
CAUTION!
– Always keep the protective port plugs attached to the transceiver optical bores and fiber-optic cable connectors until you are ready to make a connection.
– Save the protective port plug for future use.
164 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 77: Unlatching the locking bail
Ê
Carefully unlatch and fold down the locking bail on the SFP+ transceiver module.
Figure 78: Installing the first SFP+ transceiver module
Ê
Insert and slide the SFP+ transceiver module into the socket connector as far as it will go.
I
If only one slot is equipped with a SFP+ transceiver module, use the left connector as shown.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 165
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 79: Latching the locking bail
Ê
Carefully fold up and latch the locking bail.
Figure 80: Installing the protective optical port plug
Ê
If the SFP+ transceiver module is not immediately connected to an LC connector, attach the protective optical port plug to the transceiver optical bores.
166 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.2.2.3
Installing the second SFP+ transceiver module
Figure 81: Installing the second SFP+ transceiver module
Ê
If applicable, install the second SFP+ transceiver module accordingly.
9.2.3
Removing expansion card slot brackets
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
9.2.3.1
Required tools
● Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
9.2.3.2
Removing an expansion card slot bracket
Ê
Remove the two M3 x 4.5 mm screws.
Ê
Remove the controller from the mounting tabs on the slot bracket.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 167
Expansion cards and backup units
9.2.4
Replacing SFP+ transceiver modules
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
9.2.4.1
Required tools
● Tool-less
9.2.4.2
Removing the SFP+ transceiver module
Figure 82: Removing the protective optical port plug
Ê
If present, remove the protective optical port plug from the SFP+ transceiver module.
V
CAUTION!
Save the protective port plug for future use.
168 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 83: Unlatching the locking bail
Ê
Carefully unlatch and fold down the locking bail on the SFP+ transceiver module to eject the transceiver from the socket connector.
Figure 84: Removing the SFP+ transceiver module
Ê
Pull the SFP+ transceiver module out of its socket connector.
Ê
Attach the protective optical port plug to the transceiver optical bores.
I
Place the removed SFP+ transceiver module in an antistatic bag or other protective environment.
9.2.4.3
Installing the SFP+ transceiver module
Ê
Install the SFP+ transceiver module as described in section
"Installing SFP+ transceiver modules" on page 164 .
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 169
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3
Expansion cards and riser cards
Safety notes
V
CAUTION!
● Before installing/removing expansion cards to/from the server, turn off the server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cables from the outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock.
●
●
●
The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. Before handling them, first touch a metal part on the server to discharge static electricity from your body.
Do not touch the circuitry on boards and soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas or the edge of the circuit boards.
Follow the safety instructions in chapter
"Important information" on page 39 .
9.3.1
Installing an expansion card in riser module 1
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Additional task duration for FW update: 5 minutes
Average task duration: 10 minutes
9.3.1.1
Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
170 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.1.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 1" on page 61
9.3.1.3
Removing the slot cover - slot 1
Figure 85: Removing the slot cover - slot 1
Ê
Pull out the slot cover.
V
CAUTION!
Keep the slot cover for future use. If the expansion card is removed and not replaced with a new one, the slot cover must be reinstalled due to cooling, to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on electromagnetic compatibility) and to protect against fire.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 171
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.1.4
Installing the expansion card - slot 1
Ê
Please read the documentation supplied with the expansion card.
B
0
A
/
Figure 86: Installing the expansion card - slot 1
Ê
Carefully press the expansion card into the riser card slot (A), until it clicks into place (1).
Make sure that the lug on the slot cover (B) clicks into place in the corresponding hole (2).
9.3.1.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 1" on page 64
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 84
Ê
"Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 85
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
172 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
9.3.2
Installing an expansion card in riser module 2
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Additional task duration for FW update: 5 minutes
Average task duration: 10 minutes
●
●
9.3.2.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
9.3.2.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 2" on page 61
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 173
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.2.3
Removing the slot cover - slot 2 and slot 3
Figure 87: Removing the slot cover - slot 2 and slot 3
Ê
Pull out the slot cover of slot 2 (1) and/or slot 3 (2).
V
CAUTION!
Keep the slot cover for future use. If the expansion card is removed and not replaced with a new one, the slot cover must be reinstalled due to cooling, to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on electromagnetic compatibility) and to protect against fire.
174 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.2.4
Installing the expansion card - slot 2 and slot 3
Ê
Please read the documentation supplied with the expansion card.
B
0
A
/
Figure 88: Installing the expansion card - slot 2
A
/
B
0
Figure 89: Installing the expansion card - slot 3
Ê
Carefully press the expansion card into the riser card slot (A), until it clicks into place (1).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 175
Expansion cards and backup units
Make sure that the lug on the slot cover (B) clicks into place in the corresponding hole (2).
Figure 90: Example : connecting NCSI cable to expansion card
Figure 91: Example : connecting NCSI cable to system board
Ê
If necessary, connect the cables to the expansion cards and other components.
I
Connecting the NCSI cable is only necessary in order to use the
Modular LAN controller as a shared LAN interface, that allows both, management and dedicated LAN connections.
176 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.2.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 2" on page 65
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 84
Ê
"Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 85
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
9.3.3
Installing an expansion card in riser module 3
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Additional task duration for FW update: 5 minutes
Average task duration: 10 minutes
●
●
9.3.3.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 177
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.3.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
9.3.3.3
Installing the expansion card - slot 4
Ê
Please read the documentation supplied with the expansion card.
A
Figure 92: Installing the expansion card - slot 4
Ê
Carefully press the expansion card into the riser card slot (A), until it clicks into place.
Ê
Position the expansion card on the distance holder (see circle).
178 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 93: Connecting cables
Ê
If necessary, connect the cables to the expansion card.
9.3.3.4
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 84
Ê
"Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 85
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 179
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.4
Removing an expansion card in riser module 1
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
●
●
9.3.4.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
9.3.4.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 1" on page 61
180 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.4.3
Removing the expansion card - slot 1
Figure 94: Removing the expansion card - slot 1
Ê
Pull out the expansion card from the riser card slot.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 181
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.4.4
Installing the slot cover - slot 1
A
Figure 95: Installing the slot cover - slot 1
Ê
Insert the slot cover.
Make sure that the lug on the slot cover (A) clicks into place in the corresponding hole.
9.3.4.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 1" on page 64
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
182 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.5
Removing an expansion card in riser module 2
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
●
●
9.3.5.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
9.3.5.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 2" on page 61
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 183
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.5.3
Removing the expansion card- slot 2 and slot 3
Ê
If necessary, disconnect the cables from the expansion cards.
Figure 96: Removing the expansion card- slot 2
Figure 97: Installing the expansion card - slot 3
Ê
Pull out the expansion card from the riser card slot.
184 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.5.4
Installing the slot cover - slot 2 and slot 3
A
Figure 98: Installing the slot cover -slot 2 and slot 3
Ê
Insert the slot cover of slot 2 (1) and/or slot 3 (2).
Make sure that the lug on the slot cover (A) clicks into place in the corresponding hole.
9.3.5.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 2" on page 65
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 185
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.6
Removing an expansion card in riser module 3
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
●
●
9.3.6.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
9.3.6.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
186 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.6.3
Removing the expansion card - slot 4
Ê
If necessary, disconnect the cables from the expansion card.
Figure 99: Removing the expansion card - slot 4
Ê
Take the expansion card from the distance holder (1).
Ê
Pull out the expansion card from the riser card slot (2).
9.3.6.4
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 187
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.7
Replacing an expansion card in riser module 1
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Additional task duration for FW update: 5 minutes
Average task duration: 10 minutes
Note on network settings recovery
I
When replacing network controllers or the system board, network configuration settings in the operating system will be lost and replaced by default values. This applies to all static IP address and LAN teaming configurations.
Ensure to note down your current network settings before replacing a network controller or the system board.
●
●
9.3.7.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
9.3.7.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
If applicable, ensure to note down your current network settings in the operating system.
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
188 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Locating the defective component" on page 54
Ê
"Removing the riser module 1" on page 61
9.3.7.3
Removing the defective expansion card
Ê
9.3.7.4
Installing the new expansion card
Ê
9.3.7.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 1" on page 64
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 89
Ê
"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 84
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
Ê
Ê
If applicable, reconfigure your network settings in the operation system according to the original configuration of the replaced controller (expansion card or onboard).
I
Configuration of network settings should be performed by the customer. For further information, please refer to section
"Note on network settings recovery" on page 188
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 189
Expansion cards and backup units
Ê
If applicable, restore LAN teaming configurations, see
"After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers" on page 98 .
Ê
Inform the customer about changed WWN and MAC addresses, see
"Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses" on page 95 .
9.3.8
Replacing an expansion card in riser module 2
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Additional task duration for FW update: 5 minutes
Average task duration: 10 minutes
Note on network settings recovery
I
When replacing network controllers or the system board, network configuration settings in the operating system will be lost and replaced by default values. This applies to all static IP address and LAN teaming configurations.
Ensure to note down your current network settings before replacing a network controller or the system board.
●
●
9.3.8.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
190 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
RX200 S7
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.8.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
If applicable, ensure to note down your current network settings in the operating system.
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Locating the defective component" on page 54
Ê
"Removing the riser module 2" on page 61
9.3.8.3
Removing the defective expansion card
Ê
.
9.3.8.4
Installing the new expansion card
Ê
9.3.8.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 2" on page 65
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 89
Ê
"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 84
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 191
Expansion cards and backup units
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
Ê
After replacing a network controller in a server running Linux OS,
"Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 92
.
Ê
If applicable, reconfigure your network settings in the operation system according to the original configuration of the replaced controller (expansion card or onboard).
I
Configuration of network settings should be performed by the customer. For further information, please refer to section
"Note on network settings recovery" on page 190
Ê
If applicable, restore LAN teaming configurations, see
"After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers" on page 98 .
Ê
Inform the customer about changed WWN and MAC addresses, see
"Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses" on page 95 .
9.3.9
Replacing an expansion card in riser module 3
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Additional task duration for FW update: 5 minutes
Average task duration: 10 minutes
Note on network settings recovery
I
When replacing network controllers or the system board, network configuration settings in the operating system will be lost and replaced by default values. This applies to all static IP address and LAN teaming configurations.
Ensure to note down your current network settings before replacing a network controller or the system board.
192 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
●
●
9.3.9.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
9.3.9.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
If applicable, ensure to note down your current network settings in the operating system.
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Locating the defective component" on page 54
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
9.3.9.3
Removing the defective expansion card
Ê
9.3.9.4
Installing the new expansion card
Ê
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 193
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.9.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 89
Ê
"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 84
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
Ê
After replacing a network controller in a server running Linux OS,
"Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 92
.
Ê
If applicable, reconfigure your network settings in the operation system according to the original configuration of the replaced controller (expansion card or onboard).
I
Configuration of network settings should be performed by the customer. For further information, please refer to section
"Note on network settings recovery" on page 192
Ê
If applicable, restore LAN teaming configurations, see
"After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers" on page 98 .
Ê
Inform the customer about changed WWN and MAC addresses, see
"Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses" on page 95 .
194 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.10 Replacing the riser card in riser module 1
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
●
●
9.3.10.1 Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
9.3.10.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Locating the defective component" on page 54
Ê
"Removing the riser module 1" on page 61
9.3.10.3 Removing the defective riser card
Ê
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 195
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 100: Removing the riser card - slot 1
Ê
Remove the two screws (1).
Ê
Remove the riser card (2).
9.3.10.4 Installing the new riser card
Figure 101: Installing the riser card - slot 1
Ê
Insert the riser card (1).
Ê
Fasten the riser card with two screws (2).
Ê
Install the expansion card as described in section
"Installing the expansion card - slot 1" on page 172
.
196 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.10.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 1" on page 64
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
9.3.11 Replacing the riser card in riser module 2
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
●
●
9.3.11.1 Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
9.3.11.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Locating the defective component" on page 54
Ê
"Removing the riser module 2" on page 61
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 197
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.11.3 Removing the defective riser card
Ê
Remove the expansion cards as described in section
"Removing the expansion card- slot 2 and slot 3" on page 184 .
Figure 102: Removing the riser card - slot 2 and slot 3
Ê
Remove the two screws (1).
Ê
Remove the riser card (2).
198 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
9.3.11.4 Installing the new riser card
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 103: Installing the riser card - slot 2 and slot 3
Ê
Insert the riser card (1).
Ê
Fasten the riser card with two screws (2).
Ê
Install the expansion cards as described in section
"Installing the expansion card - slot 2 and slot 3" on page 175 .
9.3.11.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 2" on page 65
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 199
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.12 Replacing the riser card in riser module 3
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
●
●
9.3.12.1 Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
9.3.12.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Locating the defective component" on page 54
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
200 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.12.3 Removing the defective riser card
Ê
Figure 104: Removing the riser card - slot 4
Ê
Remove the two screws (1).
Ê
Remove the riser card (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 201
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.12.4 Installing the new riser card
Figure 105: Installing the riser card - slot 4
Ê
Insert the riser card (1).
Ê
Fasten the riser card with two screws (2).
Ê
Install the expansion card as described in section
"Installing the expansion card - slot 4" on page 178
.
9.3.12.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
202 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.3.13 Replacing TFM
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
●
●
9.3.13.1 Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver
9.3.13.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Locating the defective component" on page 54
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
9.3.13.3 Removing the defective TFM
Ê
Remove the depending expansion card as described in section
"Removing an expansion card in riser module 3" on page 186 .
Ê
Disconnect the FBU cable as described in section
"Disconnecting the FBU cable from the RAID controller" on page 224
.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 203
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 106: Removing the TFM
Ê
Remove the three screws (1).
Ê
Remove the TFM (2).
9.3.13.4 Installing the new TFM
Ê
Install the new TFM as described in section
"Installing TFM to the RAID controller (if applicable)" on page 216
.
Ê
Connect the FBU cable to the TFM as described in section "Connecting the
FBU cable to the RAID controller" on page 217 .
Ê
Install the expansion card as described in section
"Installing an expansion card in riser module 3" on page 177 .
9.3.13.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
204 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4
Backup units (BBU/FBU)
Backup units back up the memory contents of the RAID controller in the event of a power failure. You can install one backup unit.
The server offers different backup units depending on the used RAID controller:
– BBU (Battery Backup Unit)
– FBU (Flash Backup Unit)
9.4.1
Installing the BBU
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 15 minutes
V
CAUTION!
● Do not connect the cable using excessive force, the connector is weak.
●
●
9.4.1.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
9.4.1.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 205
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.1.3
Connecting the BBU cable to the BBU
I
The BBU cable is available in different length. You need the short cable if the used RAID controller is installed in slot 4.
Figure 107: Connecting the BBU cable
Ê
Connect the BBU cable to the BBU.
V
CAUTION!
Make sure that the connector side with the three dots is on the top (see close-up). Otherwise you risk short-circuits.
206 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.1.4
Installing the BBU in the holder
Figure 108: Installing the BBU in the holder
Ê
At a slight angle, fit the BBU under the right retaining bracket on the holder
(1).
Ê
Fold down the BBU until it locks in place (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 207
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.1.5
Installing the BBU with the holder
Figure 109: Position of the shoulder screw caps
Figure 110: Installing the BBU with the holder
Ê
Insert the holder into the chassis so that the three shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.
208 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
Ê
Slide the holder in direction of the arrow.
The shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor will lock in the narrow ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.
Ê
Ensure that the locking handle on the holder properly snaps in place (see circle).
9.4.1.6
Connecting the BBU cable to the RAID controller
Figure 111: Connecting the BBU cable to the RAID controller
Ê
Install a RAID controller as described in section
"Installing the expansion card - slot 4" on page 178 .
Ê
Connect the BBU cable to the RAID controller (see circle).
V
CAUTION!
Make sure that the connector side with the three dots is on the top.
Otherwise you risk short-circuits.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 209
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.1.7
Routing the BBU cable
Figure 112: Routing the BBU cable (Example A)
Figure 113: Routing the BBU cable (Example B)
Ê
Route the BBU cable as shown in the figure.
210 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.1.8
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 84
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
Note on BBU charging and calibration
The BBU may be deeply discharged due to extended storage time and wrongly show as bad or defective in the ServerView RAID Manager.
In this case, the BBU will automatically enter a trickle charge cycle for recovery.
This initial charge may take up to 8 hours before the BBU will initiate a recalibration cycle.
Ê
Enter the ServerView RAID Manager and check the current BBU status.
I
For further information, please refer to the "ServerView Suite RAID
Management" user guide, available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
(EMEA market) or http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/ (Japanese market) or from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your
PRIMERGY server.
Ê
If the BBU is shown as bad or defective, do not power off the server for at least 8 hours to allow the charge and calibration cycles to finish.
Ê
If the BBU status does not change after 8 hours, please try to initiate the recalibration process manually using the ServerView RAID Manager.
I
If this procedure still does not fix the BBU status, please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 211
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.2
Installing the FBU
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 15 minutes
V
CAUTION!
● Do not connect the cable using excessive force, the connector is weak.
●
●
9.4.2.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
9.4.2.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
212 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.2.3
Installing the FBU in the holder
Figure 114: Installing the FBU in the holder (A)
Ê
At a slight angle, fit the FBU under the right retaining bracket on the holder.
Ê
Push down the FBU until it locks in place.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 213
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 115: Installing the FBU in the holder (B)
Ê
Ensure that the FBU is properly seated in the holder as shown.
9.4.2.4
Connecting the FBU cable to the FBU
I
The FBU cable is available in different length. You need the short cable if the used RAID controller is installed in slot 4.
Figure 116: Connecting the FBU cable
Ê
Connect the FBU cable to the FBU.
214 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.2.5
Installing the FBU with the holder
Figure 117: Position of the shoulder screw caps
Figure 118: Installing the FBU with the holder
Ê
Insert the holder into the chassis so that the three shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 215
Expansion cards and backup units
Ê
Slide the holder in direction of the arrow.
The shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor will lock in the narrow ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.
Ê
Ensure that the locking handle on the holder properly snaps in place (see circle).
9.4.2.6
Installing TFM to the RAID controller (if applicable)
Figure 119: TFM kit
1 TFM 2 Screws
Figure 120: Installing TFM
Ê
Fit the spacer bolts of the TFM on the RAID controller (1).
216 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
Ê
Fasten the TFM on the RAID controller with the three screws from the TFM kit (2).
9.4.2.7
Connecting the FBU cable to the RAID controller
Figure 121: Connecting the FBU cable to the RAID controller
Ê
Install a RAID controller as described in section
"Installing the expansion card - slot 2 and slot 3" on page 175 .
Ê
Connect the FBU cable to the RAID controller (see circle).
9.4.2.8
Routing the FBU cable
Figure 122: Routing the FBU cable (Example A)
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 217
Expansion cards and backup units
Figure 123: Routing the FBU cable (Example B)
Ê
Route the FBU cable as shown in the figure.
9.4.2.9
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 84
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
218 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.3
Removing the BBU
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 15 minutes
V
CAUTION!
● Do not connect the cable using excessive force, the connector is weak.
● Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.
● Do not throw battery backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.
●
●
9.4.3.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
9.4.3.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 219
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.3.3
Disconnecting the BBU cable from the RAID controller
Figure 124: Disconnecting the BBU cable from the RAID controller
Ê
Disconnect the BBU cable from the RAID controller (see circle).
220 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.3.4
Removing the BBU with the holder
Figure 125: Removing the BBU with the holder
Ê
Lift up the green locking handle on the holder (see circle) while sliding the holder in direction of the arrow as far as it will go.
I
After that, the shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor will rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.
Ê
Lift the holder out of the chassis.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 221
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.3.5
Removing the BBU from the holder
0
/
Figure 126: Removing the BBU from the holder
Ê
Press out on the retaining bracket on the holder (1), lift the battery at the bottom side and remove the BBU at a slight angle out of the holder (2).
9.4.3.6
Disconnecting the BBU cable from the BBU
Figure 127: Disconnecting the BBU cable from the BBU
Ê
Disconnect the BBU cable from the BBU.
222 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.3.7
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
9.4.4
Removing the FBU
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 15 minutes
V
CAUTION!
● Do not connect the cable using excessive force, the connector is weak.
●
●
Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.
Do not throw battery backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.
●
●
9.4.4.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 223
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.4.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
9.4.4.3
Disconnecting the FBU cable from the RAID controller
Figure 128: Disconnecting the FBU cable from the RAID controller
Ê
Disconnect the FBU cable from the RAID controller (see circle).
224 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.4.4
Removing the FBU with the holder
Figure 129: Removing the FBU with the holder
Ê
Lift up the green locking handle on the holder (see circle) while sliding the holder in direction of the arrow as far as it will go.
I
After that, the shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor will rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.
Ê
Lift the holder out of the chassis.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 225
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.4.5
Disconnecting the FBU cable from the FBU
Figure 130: Disconnecting the FBU cable from the FBU
Ê
Disconnect the FBU cable from the FBU.
226 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.4.6
Removing the FBU from the holder
Figure 131: Removing the FBU from the holder
Ê
Pull the FBU at a slight angle out of the holder.
9.4.4.7
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 227
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.5
Replacing the BBU
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 15 minutes
V
CAUTION!
● Do not connect the cable using excessive force, the connector is weak.
● Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.
● Do not throw battery backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.
●
●
9.4.5.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
9.4.5.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
228 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.5.3
Removing the defective BBU
Ê
Remove the BBU with the holder as described in section
BBU with the holder" on page 221
.
Ê
Remove the BBU from the holder as described in section
BBU from the holder" on page 222 .
Ê
Disconnect the BBU cable from the BBU as described in section
"Disconnecting the BBU cable from the BBU" on page 222
.
9.4.5.4
Installing the new BBU
Ê
Connect the BBU cable to the BBU as described in section "Connecting the
BBU cable to the BBU" on page 206 .
Ê
Install the BBU in the holder as described in section
"Installing the BBU in the holder" on page 207 .
Ê
Install the BBU with the holder as described in section
"Installing the BBU with the holder" on page 208
.
9.4.5.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 84
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 229
Expansion cards and backup units
Note on BBU charging and calibration
The BBU may be deeply discharged due to extended storage time and wrongly show as bad or defective in the ServerView RAID Manager.
In this case, the BBU will automatically enter a trickle charge cycle for recovery.
This initial charge may take up to 8 hours before the BBU will initiate a recalibration cycle.
Ê
Enter the ServerView RAID Manager and check the current BBU status.
I
For further information, please refer to the "ServerView Suite RAID
Management" user guide, available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
(EMEA market) or http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/ (Japanese market) or from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your
PRIMERGY server.
Ê
If the BBU is shown as bad or defective, do not power off the server for at least 8 hours to allow the charge and calibration cycles to finish.
Ê
If the BBU status does not change after 8 hours, please try to initiate the recalibration process manually using the ServerView RAID Manager.
I
If this procedure still does not fix the BBU status, please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner.
9.4.6
Replacing the FBU
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 15 minutes
V
CAUTION!
● Do not connect the cable using excessive force, the connector is weak.
● Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.
● Do not throw battery backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.
230 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Expansion cards and backup units
●
●
9.4.6.1
Required tools
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
9.4.6.2
Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
9.4.6.3
Removing the defective FBU
Ê
Remove the FBU with the holder as described in section
"Removing the FBU with the holder" on page 225
.
Ê
Disconnect the FBU cable from the FBU as described in section
"Disconnecting the FBU cable from the FBU" on page 226 .
Ê
Remove the FBU from the holder as described in section "Removing the
FBU from the holder" on page 227 .
9.4.6.4
Installing the new FBU
Ê
Install the FBU in the holder as described in section
"Installing the FBU in the holder" on page 213 .
Ê
Connect the FBU cable to the FBU as described in section
FBU cable to the FBU" on page 214
.
Ê
Install the FBU with the holder as described in section
"Installing the FBU with the holder" on page 215
.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 231
Expansion cards and backup units
9.4.6.5
Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 84
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
232 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
10 Main memory
Safety notes
V
CAUTION!
● Do not install unsupported third party memory modules. For further information on supported memory modules, refer to section
"Basic information" on page 234 . Doing so may cause electric shock, a fire,
or failures.
●
●
●
●
●
Memory modules remain hot after shutdown. Wait for components to cool down before installing or removing memory modules to prevent burns.
Do not insert and remove memory modules repeatedly. Doing so may cause failures.
If the memory module has not been correctly inserted, it may cause a fire. Insert the memory module with attention to its direction.
Pressing out the securing clips on the memory module connector will eject the installed memory module. To prevent damage and injuries eject memory modules carefully without applying excessive force.
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 233
Main memory
10.1 Basic information
Front
VGA
1
1
CN101
J9
SKU Key
Slot riser card / slot 4
CPU 2 DIMM 1E
CPU 2 DIMM 2E
CPU 2 DIMM 3E
CPU 2 DIMM 1F
CPU 2 DIMM 2F
CPU 2 DIMM 3F
CPU 1 DIMM 1C
CPU 1 DIMM 2C
CPU 1 DIMM 3C
CPU 1 DIMM 1D
CPU 1 DIMM 2D
CPU 1 DIMM 3D
CPU 2
BP
PWR
Front LAN M
SMB
SAS
FAN 7/8 SYS
FAN 9/10 SYS
FAN 5/6 SYS
CPU 1
CPU 1 DIMM 3B
CPU 1 DIMM 2B
CPU 1 DIMM 1B
CPU 1 DIMM 3A
CPU 1 DIMM 2A
CPU 1 DIMM 1A
Figure 132: Slots of the main memory
CPU 2 DIMM 3H
CPU 2 DIMM 2H
CPU 2 DIMM 1H
CPU 2 DIMM 3G
CPU 2 DIMM 2G
CPU 2 DIMM 1G
INDICATE
CSS
Battery
FAN 3/4 SYS
FAN 1/2 SYS
– The system board is equipped with 24 memory connectors
(12 connectors per CPU).
– In mono processor configurations only 12 memory connectors are usable.
– The system has to be equipped with at least one memory module per processor.
– Supported capacities: 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB or 32 GB
– Maximum amount of RAM: 768 GB
234 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Main memory
– Supported memory modules:
Type
Ranking
1
SR DR QR
DDR3-1066
PC3-8500
DDR3-1333
PC3-10600
RDIMMs
(Registered DIMMs)
UDIMMs
(Unbuffered DIMMs)
DDR3-1600
PC3-12800
LRDIMMs
(Load-Reduced DIMMs)
1
SR: Single-Rank, DR: Dual-Rank, QR: Quad-Rank x x x x x x
Error
Correction
ECC or non-
ECC
I
For system relevant information please refer to the configurator of the server: for the EMEA market: http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/rack/primergy_rx200s7.html
for the Japanese market: http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 235
Main memory
10.1.1 Memory sequence
10.1.1.1 Population rules
– Populate memory slot 1 / channel A (DIMM 1A) first.
– In case of dual processor configurations, populate memory slot
1 / channel E (DIMM 1E) second.
– Within all channels, memory slot 1 must be populated prior to slot 2.
Slot 2 must be populated prior to Slot 3 (for all CPUs).
– If memory modules with different ranks are used, always populate the higher number rank DIMM first (starting from slot 1).
– If memory modules with different capacities are used:
– Populate modules with higher capacities first.
– Within a channel, populate modules in descending order of capacity.
– If memory modules with different speeds are used, the lowest clock rate applies for all DIMMs.
Regardless of the mode, all DIMMs will run at the highest common frequency that is allowed by the SPD Data of the DIMMs and the maximum speed of the selected configuration.
– Mixing UDIMMs, RDIMMs or LRDIMMs is not allowed.
– Mixing ECC and non-ECC DIMMs is not allowed.
– Mixing of quad-rank DIMMs in one channel and three DIMMs in another channel (3DPC) on the same CPU is not allowed.
236 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Main memory
10.1.1.2 Independant Channel mode
C P U
Channel
DIMM
C P U 1 C P U 2
A B D C E F H G
1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G
# D I M M s
1
4
5
2
3
6
10
11
12
7
8
9
M o n o C P U c o n f i g u r a t i o n
1
1
1
1
3
3
1 5
1 5
1 5
1 5
3
3
3
3
7
7
1 5 9 3 7
4
4
4
4
4 8
4 8
2
2
2
2
2 6
2 6
2 6
2 6
1 5 9 3 7 4 8
1 5 9 3 7 11 4 8
2
2
6
6
10
10
1 5 9 3 7 11 4 8 12 2 6 10
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
# D I M M s
2
3
4
5
6
7
D u a l C P U c o n f i g u r a t i o n
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 9
1 9
1 9
1 9
1 9
1 9
1 9
1 9
1
1
9
9
17
17
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5 13
5
5
5
5
5
13
13
13
13
13
1 9 17 5 13
1 9 17 5 13
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7 15
7 15
7 15
7 15
7
7
15
15
1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
11
11
11
3 11
3 11
3 11
3 11
3 11
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 10
2 10
2 10
2 10
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
2 10
2 10
2 10
2 10
6
6
6
6
14
14
14
14
2 10 18 6 14
3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14
3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14
3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
16
16
16
8 16
8 16
8 16
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
12
12
4 12
4 12
4 12
4 12
4 12
4 12
4 12 20
4 12 20
1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 22 8 16
1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 23 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 22 8 16
4
4
12
12
20
20
1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 23 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 22 8 16 24 4 12 20
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 237
Main memory
Notes on Independant Channel mode
– Configurations marked in grey are only possible with registered DIMMs
(RDIMMS and LR-DIMMs)
10.1.1.3 Mirrored Channel and Performance modes
C P U
Channel
DIMM
C P U 1 C P U 2
A B D C E F H G
1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G
# D I M M s
4
8
12
M o n o C P U c o n f i g u r a t i o n
1 1 1 1
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
# D I M M s
8
12
16
20
24
D u a l C P U c o n f i g u r a t i o n
1
1 3
1 3
1
1 3
1 3
1
1 3
1 3
1
1 3
1 3
2
2
2 4
2
2
2 4
2
2
2 4
2
2
2 4
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
Notes on Mirrored Channel and Performance modes
– Always populate memory modules in multiples of 4.
– Same numbers mean identical modules (capacity, rank).
238 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Main memory
10.1.1.4 Rank Sparing mode
Single-/Dual-Rank RDIMMs
C P U
Channel
DIMM
C P U 1 C P U 2
A B D C E F H G
1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G
# D I M M s
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
6
7
8
M o n o C P U c o n f i g u r a t i o n o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
# DIMMs
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Dual CPU configuration (if all modules are of the same capacity) o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 239
Main memory
C P U C P U 1 C P U C P U 2
Ch.
DIMM
E F H G
1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C DIMM 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G
#
Dual CPU configuration
(if modules are of different capacities)
#
Dual CPU configuration
(if modules are of different capacities)
2
3
4
5
6 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
2
3
4
5
6 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
7
8 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
7
8 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
9
10
11 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
9
10 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 11 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
12 o o o o o o o o o o o o 12 o o o o o o o o o o o o
I
For detailed population rules, refer to section
"Notes on Rank Sparing mode" on page 242
.
240 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Main memory
Quad-Rank RDIMMs
C P U
Channel
DIMM
C P U 1 C P U 2
A B D C E F H G
1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G
# D I M M s
1
2
3
4
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
9
M o n o C P U c o n f i g u r a t i o n o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
# DIMMs
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
7
8
9
Dual CPU configuration (if all modules are of the same capacity) o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 241
Main memory
C P U C P U 1 C P U C P U 2
Ch.
DIMM
E F H G
1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C DIMM 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G
#
Dual CPU configuration
(if modules are of different capacities)
1
2
3
4 o o o o o o o o o 5
6
7
8
9 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
10 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 o o o o o o o o o o o o o
(if modules are of different capacities) o o o o o
Dual CPU configuration o o o o o o o o o o o o 10 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
11 o o o o o o o o o o o 11 o o o o o o o o o o o
12 o o o o o o o o o o o o 12 o o o o o o o o o o o o
Notes on Rank Sparing mode
– Same numbers mean identical modules (capacity, rank)
– In case of Single-/Dual-Rank memory configurations, at least two 1R or 2R modules must be populated per a channel.
– In case of Quad-Rank memory modules, please note the following: Due to performance reasons, always populate a new channel before installing the
3rd memory slot of a channel.
– Only one memory module capacity per CPU is allowed.
If two different memory module capacities have been ordered for Rank
Sparing mode, populate them on different CPUs, so that each CPUs only comprises modules of one capacity
Example:
12 modules have been ordered, 8 x 4 GB and 4 x 8 GB.
In this case, proceed as follows:
Ê
Use the capacity group with more memory modules for CPU 1 and populate them according to the population sequence for mono CPU configurations.
Ê
Populate the other capacity group on CPU 2 according to the population rules for mono CPU configurations.
242 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Main memory
– In order to satisfy cooling requirements, populate memory channels on alternating sides of the processor:
Order
1
2
3
4
CPU 1
Channel A
Channel C
Channel B
Channel D
CPU 2
Channel E
Channel G
Channel F
Channel H
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 243
Main memory
10.2 Installing a memory module
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
10.2.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
10.2.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the air duct" on page 63
10.2.3 Selecting the memory slot
Ê
Choose the memory slot according to the configuration rules in
"Basic information" on page 234 .
244 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
10.2.4 Installing a memory module
Main memory
Figure 133: Opening the securing clips
Ê
Press the securing clips on both sides of the memory slot concerned outward.
Figure 134: Installing a memory module
Ê
Carefully press the memory module into the memory slot (1) until the securing clips on both sides of it engage (2).
10.2.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the air duct" on page 63
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Updating the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 81
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 245
Main memory
10.3 Removing a memory module
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
10.3.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
10.3.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the air duct" on page 63
246 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
10.3.3 Removing a memory module
Main memory
Figure 135: Removing the memory module
Ê
Press the securing clips on both sides of the memory slot concerned outward (1).
Ê
Pull the memory module out of the slot (2).
10.3.4 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the air duct" on page 63
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 247
Main memory
10.4 Replacing a memory module
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
10.4.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
10.4.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the air duct" on page 63
Ê
"Locating the defective component" on page 54
10.4.3 Removing the defective memory module
Ê
Remove the memory module as described in section
"Removing a memory module" on page 247 .
248 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Main memory
10.4.4 Installing the new memory module
Ê
Install the memory module as described in section "Installing a memory module" on page 245
.
10.4.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the air duct" on page 63
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Updating the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 81
Ê
"Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 89
Ê
"Verifying the memory mode" on page 90
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 249
Main memory
250 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
11 Processors
Safety notes
V
CAUTION!
● Do not install unsupported processors. For further information on
supported processors, refer to section "Supported processors" on page 252
.
● Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up
(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostaticsensitive devices (ESDs).
●
●
●
●
Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit boards by their metallic areas or edges.
When removing or installing the processor, be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the processor socket.
Never touch the underside of the processor. Even minor soiling such as grease from the skin can impair the processor’s operation or destroy the processor.
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 251
Processors
11.1
Basic information
y
CPU 2 DIMM 2F
CPU 2 DIMM 3F
CPU 1 DIMM 1C
CPU 1 DIMM 2C
CPU 1 DIMM 3C
CPU 1 DIMM 1D
CPU 1 DIMM 2D
CPU 1 DIMM 3D
CPU 2
FAN 9/10 SYS
FAN 7/8 SYS
CPU 1
FAN 5/6 SYS
CPU 2 DIMM 3H
CPU 2 DIMM 2H
CPU 2 DIMM 1H
CPU 2 DIMM 3G
CPU 2 DIMM 2G
CPU 2 DIMM 1G
INDICATE
CSS
FAN 3/4 SYS
1/2 SYS
Figure 136: CPU slots
CPU 1 DIMM 3B
CPU 1 DIMM 2B
11.1.1 Supported processors
– up to two Intel
®
Dual-Core, Quad-Core, Six-Core or Eight-Core processors
(Xeon E5-xxxx or E5-xxxxL)
– two processor sockets LGA 2011
– supported CPUs from 60 W to 135 W
– core frequencies of more than 3 GHz
I
For system relevant information please refer to the configurator of the server: for the EMEA market: http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/rack/primergy_rx200s7.html
for the Japanese market: http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/
11.1.2 General equipping rules
Both CPUs must be of the same type.
252 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Processors
11.2
Upgrading to dual processor configuration
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Additional task duration for BIOS Flash: 5 minutes
Average task duration: 15 minutes
V
CAUTION!
– Processors are modules which are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharges and therefore must always be handled with care. After a processor has been removed from its protective sleeve or from its socket, place it with its smooth side down on a nonconducting, antistatic surface. Never push a processor over a surface.
– Only processors of the same type may be used on the system board.
That means the number of the internal processor cores as well as the primary clock and the QPI frequency have to be the same.
– For dual operation, use a suitable multiprocessor operating system.
11.2.1 Required tools
●
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Installing the heat sink:
– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
Installing the processor: tool-less
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 253
Processors
11.2.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the air duct" on page 63
11.2.3 Installing the processor
Figure 137: Opening socket release lever 1
Ê
Unlatch the socket release lever marked Open 1st by pushing it down and away from the socket (1).
Ê
The socket release lever will slightly lift up (2).
254 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Processors
Figure 138: Opening socket release lever 2
Ê
Unlatch the socket release lever marked Close 1st by pushing it down and away from the socket (1).
Ê
Fully fold back the second socket release lever (2).
Figure 139: Opening the load plate (A)
Ê
Push down on the first socket release lever (1) to lift the load plate away from the socket (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 255
Processors
Figure 140: Opening the load plate (B)
Ê
Fully open the load plate.
V
CAUTION!
Be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the processor socket!
Ê
Make sure that the load plate is in the fully open position.
256 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Processors
Figure 141: Installing the processor
Ê
Hold the processor with your thumb and index finger.
Ê
Make sure that the four notches on the processor align with the posts on the socket (see close-up).
Ê
Lower the processor straight down without tilting or sliding it in the socket.
V
CAUTION!
– Ensure that the processor is level in the socket.
– Be careful not to touch or bend the pins on the processor socket.
– Never touch the underside of the processor. Even minor soiling such as grease from the skin can impair the processor’s operation or destroy the processor.
– Ensure not to scrape or dent the processor edges.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 257
Processors
Figure 142: Closing the load plate
Ê
Carefully lower the load plate over the processor.
Figure 143: Removing the protective socket cover
Ê
When closing the load plate, the protective socket cover will automatically detach.
258 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Processors
Ê
Remove the socket cover and save it for future use.
V
CAUTION!
Always replace the socket cover if you remove the processor from the socket!
Figure 144: Closing socket release lever 2
Ê
Fully close and hold shut the load plate.
Ê
Close the socket release lever marked Close 1st (1) and latch it under the load plate retention tab to lock down the load plate (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 259
Processors
Figure 145: Closing socket release lever 1
Ê
Close the socket release lever marked Open 1st (1) and latch it under the load plate retention tab (2).
11.2.4 Installing the heat sink
I
Processors with 135W need dedicated heat sinks (part number V26898-
B964-V3).
Figure 146: Heat sink (part number V26898-B964-V3)
260 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Processors
Ê
Remove the protective cover from the heat sink.
V
CAUTION!
Ensure not to touch the heat-conductive paste on the bottom of the heat sink.
Figure 147: Installing the heat sink
Ê
Align the heat sink and fit it on the processor socket.
Ê
Position the screws in the holes carefully, making sure they are upright.
V
CAUTION!
– Ensure that the screws on the heat sink are properly seated on the threaded holes.
– Ensure that the heat sink cooling fins match the direction of the airflow!
Ê
Fasten it in a crossover pattern with four screws according to the numbering
(torque 1.0 Nm, the description of this torque value doesn't apply to the
Japanese market.)
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 261
Processors
11.2.5 Upgrading the main memory
Ê
Select an adequate memory configuration for "Two CPUs populated" as described in section
"Memory sequence" on page 236 .
Ê
Install memory modules as described in section
"Installing a memory module" on page 244 .
11.2.6 Installing two additional fan modules
Figure 148: Removing sponges
Ê
Remove the two sponges from the system fan bays "FAN 7/8" and "FAN
9/10".
Figure 149: Installed fan modules
Ê
Install two fan modules in the system fan bays "FAN 7/8" and "FAN 9/10" as described in section
"Installing the new fan module" on page 148
.
262 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
11.2.7 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the air duct" on page 63
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Updating the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 81
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
Processors
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 263
Processors
11.3
Replacing a processor
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Additional task duration for BIOS Flash: 5 minutes
Average task duration: 15 minutes
V
CAUTION!
Processors are modules which are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharges and therefore must always be handled with care. After a processor has been removed from its protective sleeve or from its socket, place it with its smooth side down on a non-conducting, antistatic surface. Never push a processor over a surface.
11.3.1 Required tools
●
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Installing the heat sink:
– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
Installing the processor: tool-less
11.3.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
264 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the air duct" on page 63
11.3.3 Removing the heat sink
Processors
Figure 150: Removing the heat sink
Ê
Loosen the four screws of the heat sink in a crossover pattern according to the numbering.
Ê
Carefully turn the heat sink back and forth to detach it from the processor.
I
This may be necessary due to the adhesive quality of the thermal paste located between the heat sink and the processor.
V
CAUTION!
Pay special attention not to damage any system board components surrounding the processor socket.
Ê
Lift the heat sink out of the chassis.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 265
Processors
11.3.4 Cleaning the heat sink underside and the processor surface
Ê
Remove the residual thermal paste from the underside of the heat sink and the surface of the processor.
Ê
Clean the underside of the heat sink and the surface of the processor using a lint-free cloth.
11.3.5 Removing the defective processor
Figure 151: Opening socket release lever 1
Ê
Unlatch the socket release lever marked Open 1st by pushing it down and away from the socket (1).
Ê
The socket release lever will slightly lift up (2).
266 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Processors
Figure 152: Opening socket release lever 2
Ê
Unlatch the socket release lever marked Close 1st by pushing it down and away from the socket (1).
Ê
Fully fold back the second socket release lever (2).
Figure 153: Opening the load plate (A)
Ê
Push down on the socket release lever marked Open 1st (1) to lift the load plate away from the socket (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 267
Processors
Figure 154: Opening the load plate (B)
Ê
Fully open the load plate.
268 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Processors
Figure 155: Removing the processor
Ê
Carefully remove the processor from its socket in a vertical motion.
V
CAUTION!
Be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the processor socket.
Ê
Thoroughly clean residual thermal paste from the processor surface using a lint-free cloth.
Ê
If the processor is being replaced during a CPU upgrade and may be reused later, store it in a save place.
V
CAUTION!
Processors are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge and must be handled with care. After a processor has been removed from its protective sleeve or from its socket, place it upside down on a nonconducting, antistatic surface. Never push a processor over a surface.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 269
Processors
11.3.6 Installing the new processor
Ê
Remove the protective cap from the bottom side of the processor.
Figure 156: Installing the processor
Ê
Hold the processor with your thumb and index finger.
Ê
Make sure that the four notches on the processor align with the posts on the socket (see close-up).
Ê
Lower the processor straight down without tilting or sliding it in the socket.
V
CAUTION!
– Ensure that the processor is level in the socket.
– Be careful not to touch or bend the pins on the processor socket.
– Never touch the underside of the processor. Even minor soiling such as grease from the skin can impair the processor’s operation or destroy the processor.
– Ensure not to scrape or dent the processor edges.
270 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Processors
Figure 157: Closing the load plate
Ê
Carefully lower the load plate over the processor.
V
CAUTION!
Always replace the socket cover if you remove the processor from the socket!
Figure 158: Closing socket release lever 2
Ê
Fully close and hold shut the load plate.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 271
Processors
Ê
Close the socket release lever marked Close 1st (1) and latch it under the load plate retention tab to lock down the load plate (2).
Figure 159: Closing socket release lever 1
Ê
Close the socket release lever marked Open 1st (1) and latch it under the load plate retention tab (2).
11.3.7 Applying the thermal paste to the processor surface
I
– For the Japanese market, the service engineer must follow the instruction provided separately.
– If the processor replacement kit contains a new heat sink, a thin layer of thermal compound has already been pre-applied to its lower
surface. In this case, please proceed with section "Installing the heat sink" on page 275 .
272 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Processors
Figure 160: Thermal paste syringe
One thermal compound syringe (FTS-FSP:P304000004) contains thermal paste for three processors.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 273
Processors
Figure 161: Applying the thermal paste
Ê
Apply a small point-shaped amount of thermal paste (1.0 gram, see description above) to the center of the processor surface as shown.
V
CAUTION!
Do not mix different types of thermal paste.
274 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Processors
11.3.8 Installing the heat sink
I
Processors with 135W need dedicated heat sinks (part number V26898-
B964-V3).
Figure 162: Installing the heat sink
Ê
Align the heat sink and fit it on the processor socket.
Ê
Position the screws in the holes carefully, making sure they are upright.
V
CAUTION!
– Ensure that the screws on the heat sink are properly seated on the threaded holes.
– Ensure that the heat sink cooling fins match the direction of the airflow!
Ê
Fasten it in a crossover pattern with four screws according to the numbering
(torque 1.0 Nm, the description of this torque value doesn't apply to the
Japanese market.)
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 275
Processors
11.3.9 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the air duct" on page 63
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Updating the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 81
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
276 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Processors
11.4
Replacing a heat sink
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Average task duration: 15 minutes
11.4.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps:
– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
11.4.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the air duct" on page 63
11.4.3 Removing the defective heat sink
Ê
Remove the heat sink as described in section "Removing the heat sink" on page 265 .
11.4.4 Cleaning the processor surface
Ê
Remove the residual thermal paste from the processor surface.
Ê
Clean the processor surface using a lint-free cloth.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 277
Processors
11.4.5 Installing the new heat sink
I
Processors with 135W need dedicated heat sinks (part number V26898-
B964-V3).
Ê
Install the heat sink as described in section "Installing the heat sink" on page 260
.
11.4.6 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the air duct" on page 63
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
278 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
12 Optical disk drive
Safety notes
V
CAUTION!
● Before installing/removing an accessible drive to/from the server, turn off the server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cables from the outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock.
●
●
●
●
●
●
When installing an accessible drive, hold it by the side. Applying force to the top may cause failures.
Do not touch the circuitry on boards and soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas or the edge of the circuit boards.
The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. Before handling them, first touch a metal part on the server to discharge static electricity from your body.
Before installing an internal accessible drive, see the manual for the accessible drive.
When forcing an accessible drive into a server, be careful so as not to pinch the cable etc. connected to an accessible drive.
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 279
Optical disk drive
12.1 Basic information
In configurations with up to four HDD/SSD modules a 5.25-inch slimline optical
disk drive (ODD) can be installed in the right bottom side bay (see figure 249 on page 377 ).
12.2 Installing the ODD
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 10 minutes
12.2.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
12.2.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
280 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
12.2.3 Removing the dummy module
Optical disk drive
Figure 163: Removing the dummy module
Ê
Press the lock in direction of the arrow until it disengages (1).
Ê
Push the dummy module out of the bay (2).
Figure 164: Removing the dummy out of the mounting frame
Ê
Pull the mounting frame outward on both sides (1).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 281
Optical disk drive
Ensure that the pins on the mounting frame disengage with the screw holes on the dummy (see circles).
Ê
Remove the dummy (2).
V
CAUTION!
Keep the dummy for future use. If you remove the accessible drive again and do not replace it with a new one, the dummy must be reinstalled to comply with EMC regulations and to satisfy cooling requirements and fire protection measures.
12.2.4 Installing the ODD
Figure 165: Installing the ODD in the mounting frame
Ê
Insert the ODD in the mounting frame.
Ensure that the four pins on the mounting frame engage with the screw holes on the ODD and fix them in this position.
282 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Optical disk drive
Figure 166: Installing the ODD
Ê
Push the ODD into the bay until it clicks in.
12.2.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 283
Optical disk drive
12.3 Removing the ODD
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Average task duration: 10 minutes
12.3.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
12.3.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 77
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
284 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
12.3.3 Removing the ODD
Optical disk drive
Figure 167: Removing the ODD
Ê
Press the lock in direction of the arrow until it disengages (1).
Ê
Push the ODD out of the bay (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 285
Optical disk drive
Figure 168: Removing the ODD out of the mounting frame
Ê
Pull the mounting frame outward on both sides (1).
Ensure that the pins on the mounting frame disengage with the screw holes on the ODD.
Ê
Remove the ODD (2).
286 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
12.3.4 Installing the dummy module
Optical disk drive
Figure 169: Installing the dummy in the mounting frame
Ê
Insert the dummy in the mounting frame.
Ensure that the pins on the mounting frame engage with the screw holes on the dummy and fix them in this position (see circles).
Figure 170: Installing the dummy module
Ê
Push the dummy module inward until it engages.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 287
Optical disk drive
12.3.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
Ê
"Verifying and configuring the backup software solution" on page 86
12.4 Replacing the ODD
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Average task duration: 10 minutes
12.4.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
12.4.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 77
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
288 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Optical disk drive
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
12.4.3 Removing the defective ODD
Ê
Remove the ODD as described in section
"Removing the ODD" on page 285 .
12.4.4 Installing the new ODD
Ê
Install the ODD as described in section
"Installing the ODD" on page 282 .
12.4.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 289
Optical disk drive
290 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
13 Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Safety notes
V
CAUTION!
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
13.1 Basic information
– Front VGA/LAN module
The front VGA/LAN module offers a VGA connector and/or a LAN connector on the front side of the server.
The LAN connector can be used as LAN management connector.
The customer can order the options front VGA and front LAN both or separately.
– Front panel
The front panel module consists of the front panel board, a front panel and a holder. These components are already pre-assembled.
The PRIMERGY RX200 S7 server’s chassis ID is stored on both the front panel board and the system board. After replacing the front panel module, it is necessary to program the ChassisID prom of the front panel board.
Beside the CPU temperature sensor and housing temperature sensor provided on the system board, an ambient temperature sensor is also included on the front panel board. In case of a defective ambient temperature sensor, please replace the front panel module.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 291
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.2 Installing the front VGA and/or front LAN
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 10 minutes
13.2.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
13.2.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
292 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.2.3 Removing the front VGA/LAN module
Figure 171: Removing the front VGA/LAN module
Ê
Lift up the green touch point (1).
Ê
Pull the front VGA/LAN module out of the bay (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 293
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.2.4 Removing the covers
Figure 172: Removing the covers
Ê
Break out the cover for the front VGA connector (A) and/or front LAN connector (B).
13.2.5 Installing the front VGA connector
Figure 173: Inserting the front VGA connector
Ê
Insert the front VGA connector from the inside.
294 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Figure 174: Fastening the front VGA connector
Ê
Fasten the front VGA connector with the two screws (see circles).
Ê
Store the front VGA cable in the guidings (A).
13.2.6 Installing the front LAN connector
Ê
Turn the front VGA/LAN module around.
Figure 175: Inserting the front LAN connector
Ê
Thread the front LAN connector through the opening.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 295
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Figure 176: Pushing down the front LAN connector
Ê
Push the front LAN connector down.
Figure 177: Pushing frontward the front LAN connector
Ê
Push the front LAN connector to the front side until the hooks engage (see close-up).
296 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Ê
Turn the front VGA/LAN module around.
Figure 178: Storing the front LAN cable
Ê
Store the front LAN cable in the guidings (A).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 297
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.2.7 Installing the front VGA/LAN module
Figure 179: Installing the front VGA/LAN module
Ê
Thread the free ends of the cables through the bay.
Ê
Push the front VGA/LAN module into the bay from the front (1) until the locking mechanism engages (2).
298 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.2.8 Connecting the front VGA cable
Figure 180: Connecting the front VGA cable
Ê
Route the front VGA cable as shown in the photo.
Ê
Connect the front VGA cable to the system board connector "FRONT VGA".
13.2.9 Connecting the front LAN cable
I
The front LAN card is already mounted in its holder.
Figure 181: Connecting the front LAN cable to the front LAN card
Ê
Connect the front LAN cable to the front LAN card.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 299
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.2.10 Installing the front LAN card
Figure 182: Installing the front LAN card
Ê
Carefully press the front LAN card with its holder into the "FRONT LAN M" slot until it clicks into place (see circle).
Ê
Store the front LAN cable behind the front panel module.
13.2.11 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
300 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.2.12 Using the front management LAN connector
In order to use the front management LAN connector to access the iRMC S3 management controller, please proceed as follows:
Ê
Ensure that Management LAN has been enabled in the BIOS:
Ê
Enter the BIOS.
Ê
Select the Server Mgmt menu.
Ê
Under iRMC LAN Parameters Configuration, make sure that the
Management LAN setting is set to Enabled.
Ê
Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
I
The front management LAN connector can be used to access the iRMC S3 with either of the Management LAN Port settings enabled,
Management or Shared.
For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the "System Board D3032 BIOS Setup Utility" reference manual.
Ê
Connect a client computer (e.g. notebook) to the front management LAN connector.
I
It is not possible to simultaneously access the iRMC S3 from the front and rear management LAN connectors. As soon as a LAN cable is connected to the front management LAN connector, the iRMC S3 cannot be accessed via the rear management LAN connector.
After removing the LAN cable from the front management LAN connector, the iRMC S3 will immediately become accessible via the rear management LAN connector again.
Ê
Accessing the iRMC S3 using the front management LAN connector is only possible via the preset IP address 192.168.1.1 and cannot be configured otherwise.
Configure your client computer to use any static IP address on subnet
192.168.1.x (except 192.168.1.1) with subnet mask 255.255.255.0.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 301
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.3 Removing the front VGA and/or front LAN
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 10 minutes
13.3.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
13.3.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
302 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.3.3 Removing the front LAN card
Figure 183: Removing the front LAN card
Ê
Press the two sides of the holder together (1) until the locking mechanism disengages.
Ê
Carefully pull the holder with the front LAN card out of its slot (2).
13.3.4 Disconnecting the front LAN cable
Figure 184: Disconnecting the front LAN cable from the front LAN card
Ê
Disconnect the front LAN cable from the front LAN card.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 303
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.3.5 Disconnecting the front VGA cable
Figure 185: Disconnecting the front VGA cable
Ê
Disconnect the front VGA cable from the system board connector "FRONT
VGA".
13.3.6 Removing the front VGA/LAN module
Ê
Remove the front VGA/LAN module as described in section
"Removing the front VGA/LAN module" on page 293 .
304 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.3.7 Removing the front LAN connector
Figure 186: Taking out the front LAN cable
Ê
Take the front LAN cable out of the guidings (A).
Ê
Turn the front VGA/LAN module around.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 305
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Figure 187: Pushing inward the front LAN connector
Ê
Disengage the hooks (1) and simultaneously push the front LAN connector inward (2).
Figure 188: Pushing upward the front LAN connector
Ê
Push the front LAN connector upward.
306 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Figure 189: Removing the front LAN connector
Ê
Thread the front LAN connector through the opening and remove it.
Ê
Turn the front VGA/LAN module around.
13.3.8 Removing the front VGA connector
Figure 190: Loosening the front VGA connector
Ê
Take the front VGA cable out of the guidings (A).
Ê
Remove the two screws (see circles).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 307
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Figure 191: Removing the front VGA connector
Ê
Push the front VGA connector inside and remove it.
13.3.9 Installing the front VGA/LAN module
Ê
Install the front VGA/LAN module as described in section
.
13.3.10 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
308 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.4 Replacing the front VGA cable and/or front
LAN cable
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 10 minutes
13.4.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
13.4.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 309
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.4.3 Removing the defective front VGA cable and/or front LAN cable
Ê
Remove the front LAN card as described in section "Removing the front LAN card" on page 303 .
Ê
Disconnect the front LAN cable from the front LAN card as described in
section "Disconnecting the front LAN cable" on page 303
.
Ê
Disconnect the front VGA cable from the system board as described in
section "Disconnecting the front VGA cable" on page 304 .
Ê
Remove the front VGA/LAN module as described in section
"Removing the front VGA/LAN module" on page 293 .
Ê
Ê
.
13.4.4 Installing the new front VGA cable and/or front LAN cable
Ê
Install the front VGA connector as described in section "Installing the front
Ê
Install the front LAN connector as described in section "Installing the front
.
Ê
Ê
Connect the front VGA cable to the system board connector as described in
section "Connecting the front VGA cable" on page 299
.
Ê
Connect the front LAN cable to the front LAN card as described in section
"Connecting the front LAN cable" on page 299 .
Ê
Install the front LAN card as described in section "Installing the front LAN card" on page 300 .
310 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.4.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 311
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.5 Replacing the front LAN card
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 10 minutes
13.5.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
13.5.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
13.5.3 Removing the defective front LAN card
Ê
Remove the front LAN card as described in section "Removing the front LAN card" on page 303 .
Ê
Disconnect the front LAN cable from the front LAN card as described in
section "Disconnecting the front LAN cable" on page 303
.
312 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.5.4 Installing the new front LAN card
Ê
Connect the front LAN cable to the front LAN card as described in section
"Connecting the front LAN cable" on page 299
.
Ê
Install the front LAN card as described in section
"Installing the front LAN card" on page 300
.
13.5.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 92
Ê
"Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses" on page 95
Ê
"Configuring LAN teaming" on page 97
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 313
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.6 Replacing the front panel board
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Additional task duration for ChassisID Prom tool: 5 minutes
Average task duration: 10 minutes
Note on system information backup / restore
I
The front panel board contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains system information like server name and model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.
To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID
EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored from the front panel board to the new system board.
V
CAUTION!
For that reason the front panel board and system board must not be replaced simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration data on the system board would fail.
13.6.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
314 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
13.6.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Locating the defective component" on page 54
13.6.3 Removing the defective front panel board
A
Figure 192: Disconnecting the front panel cable
Ê
Disconnect the front panel cable from the system board connector "Front
Panel".
Ê
Take the front panel cable out of the guiding (A).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 315
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Ê
Ê
If applicable, disconnect the front LAN cable as described in section
"Disconnecting the front LAN cable" on page 303
.
Ê
If applicable, disconnect the front VGA cable as described in section
"Disconnecting the front VGA cable" on page 304 .
Figure 193: Removing the ID card and screw
Ê
Remove the ID card (1).
Ê
Remove the screw (2).
316 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Figure 194: Removing the front panel module
Ê
Push the front panel module frontward out of the bay.
Ê
Thread all cables through the opening.
Figure 195: Removing the front VGA/LAN module
Ê
Lift up the green touch point (1).
Ê
Push the front VGA/LAN module frontward out of the bay (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 317
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Figure 196: Disconnecting the front panel cable
Ê
Open the cable clamp, if applicable (1).
Ê
Disconnect the front panel cable (2).
Figure 197: Removing the front panel frame
Ê
Press the lock inside (1).
318 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Ê
Swivel the front panel frame outward (2).
Ê
Unhook the front panel frame on the left side (3) and remove it.
Figure 198: Removing the front panel board
Ê
Remove the two screws (1).
Ê
Remove the front panel board from the frame (2).
13.6.4 Installing the new front panel module
Figure 199: Position pins and nose
Figure 200: Installing the front panel board
Ê
Position the front panel board on the frame regarding the pins and the nose
(1).
Ê
Fasten the front panel board to the frame with the two screws (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 319
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Figure 201: Installing the front panel frame
Ê
Hook the front panel frame in on the left side (1).
Ê
Swivel the front panel frame inward (2) until the lock clicks in (3).
Figure 202: Connecting the front panel cable
Ê
Connect the front panel cable (1).
Ê
Close the cable clamp, if applicable (2).
320 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Figure 203: Installing the front VGA/LAN module
Ê
Push the front VGA/LAN module into the bay.
Figure 204: Installing the front panel module
Ê
Thread all cables through the opening.
Ê
Push the front panel module into the bay.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 321
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Figure 205: Inserting screw and ID card
Ê
Fasten the front panel module with the screw (1).
Ê
Insert the ID card (2).
A
Figure 206: Connecting the front panel cable
Ê
Store the front panel cable under the guiding (A).
322 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
Ê
Connect the front panel cable to the system board connector "Front Panel".
Ê
If applicable, connect the front VGA cable as described in section
"Connecting the front VGA cable" on page 299 .
Ê
If applicable, connect the front LAN cable as described in section
"Connecting the front LAN cable" on page 299
.
Ê
.
13.6.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool" on page 97
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 83
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 323
Front panel and front VGA/LAN module
324 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
14 Serial interface
Safety notes
V
CAUTION!
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
14.1 Basic information
The serial interface can be installed in the slot cover of riser module 1 (slot 1) or in the slot cover of riser module 2 (slot 2).
14.2 Installing the serial interface
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
Ԙ ԙ
Figure 207: Serial interface kit
1 Long slot bracket
I
The long slot bracket is not used in this server.
2 Serial interface with short slot bracket
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 325
Serial interface
14.2.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
14.2.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
14.2.3 Removing the slot cover
Ê
Remove the riser module 1 or the riser module2 as described in section
"Removing riser modules" on page 61 .
Ê
"Removing the slot cover - slot 2 and slot 3" on page 174
.
326 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
14.2.4 Installing the serial interface
Serial interface
Figure 208: Installing the serial interface - slot 1
Ê
Install the serial interface in slot 1 or slot 2.
Ê
Install the riser module 1 or the riser module2 as described in section
"Installing riser modules" on page 64
.
Figure 209: Connecting the serial interface cable
Ê
Connect the serial interface cable to the system board connector "SERIAL
1".
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 327
Serial interface
14.2.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
14.3 Removing the serial interface
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
14.3.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
14.3.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
328 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
14.3.3 Removing the serial interface
Serial interface
Figure 210: Disconnecting the serial interface cable
Ê
Disconnect the serial interface cable from the system board connector
"SERIAL 1".
Ê
Remove the riser module 1 or the riser module2 as described in section
"Removing riser modules" on page 61
.
Figure 211: Removing the serial interface - slot 1
Ê
Remove the serial interface from slot 1 or slot 2.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 329
Serial interface
14.3.4 Installing the slot cover
Ê
Install the slot cover of slot 1 or slot 2 as described in section
"Installing the slot cover - slot 1" on page 182
or "Installing the slot cover - slot 2 and slot
.
Ê
Install the riser module 1 or the riser module2 as described in section
"Installing riser modules" on page 64 .
14.3.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
14.4 Replacing the serial interface
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
V
CAUTION!
Follow the safety instructions in chapter
"Important information" on page 39 .
14.4.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
330 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Serial interface
14.4.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
14.4.3 Removing the defective serial interface
Ê
Remove the serial interface as described in section
"Removing the serial interface" on page 329
.
14.4.4 Installing the new serial interface
Ê
Install the serial interface as described in section
"Installing the serial interface" on page 327
.
14.4.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 331
Serial interface
332 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
15 System board and components
Safety notes
V
CAUTION!
Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 39
.
15.1 Basic information
This section provides instructions for the system board and the following components:
●
●
●
●
UFM (USB Flash Module)
The server can be equipped with a USB Flash Module (UFM).
TPM (Trusted Platform Module)
The system board is optionally equipped with a Trusted Platform Module
(TPM). This module enables programs from third party manufacturers to store key information, for example drive encryption using Windows Bitlocker
Drive Encryption.
SCU key
The SCU key enables the SAS functionality of the Onboard controller.
Lithium battery
To allow permanent saving of the system information, a lithium battery is installed which supplies the CMOS memory with power. If the battery voltage is too low or the battery is empty, a corresponding error message is displayed. The lithium battery must then be replaced.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 333
System board and components
15.2 Installing the UFM
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Additional task duration for uploading "Recovery CD" image:
5 minutes
Average task duration: 5 minutes
0
1
2
Figure 212: UFM installation kit
1 USB Flash Module (UFM)
2 UFM nylon screw
3 UFM spacer
15.2.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver
334 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
15.2.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
15.2.3 Installing the UFM
Figure 213: Position on the system board
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 335
System board and components
Figure 214: Installing the UFM
Ê
Connect the UFM to the system board. The UFM spacer must click into the hole on the system board.
15.2.4 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
336 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
15.2.5 Software configuration
The UFM delivery set includes the "Recovery Tool CD" to setup the ESXi configuration. Proceed as follows:
Ê
Switch on the server.
Ê
Right after switching on the server, insert the "Recovery Tool CD" into the
DVD drive and close the drive tray.
Ê
The server should now boot from the "Recovery Tool CD".
Ê
Follow the on-screen instructions.
15.3 Installing the TPM
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Additional task duration for software configuration: 5 minutes
Average task duration: 5 minutes
/
0 1
2
Figure 215: TPM installation kit
1 TPM (Trusted Platform Module) 3 Special screw for TPM
2 TPM spacer
I
The black TPM spacer is not used in this server.
4 TPM bit insert for TPM special screw
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 337
System board and components
15.3.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Installing the TPM:
– Bit screw driver
– TPM bit insert (*)
(*) For the Japanese market:
– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)
15.3.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 1" on page 61
15.3.3 Installing the TPM
Figure 216: Position on the system board
338 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
Figure 217: Inserting the TPM spacer on the system board
Ê
Insert the TPM spacer into the hole on the system board.
Figure 218: TPM bit insert
Ê
Attach the TPM bit insert or TPM module fixing tool (Japanese market) to a bit screw driver.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 339
System board and components
Figure 219: Installing the TPM
Ê
Connect the TPM to the system board (1).
Ê
Fasten the TPM with the special screw for the TPM using the TPM bit insert or TPM module fixing tool (Japanese market) (2).
V
CAUTION!
Do not fasten the screw too firmly. Stop it by extent where the head of the screw lightly touches the TPM (torque value of 0.6 Nm).
15.3.4 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 1" on page 64
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
Ê
Enable TPM in the system board BIOS. Proceed as follows:
Ê
Switch on or restart your server.
Ê
As soon as the startup screen appears, press the [F2] function key to enter the BIOS.
340 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
Ê
Select the Advanced menu.
Ê
Select the Trusted Computing submenu.
Ê
Set the TPM Support and TPM State settings to Enabled.
Ê
Under Pending TPM operation, select the desired TPM operation mode.
Ê
Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
I
For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the "System Board D3032 BIOS Setup Utilty" reference manual available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
or from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server.
15.4 Removing the UFM
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
15.4.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps:
– Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver
– long nose pliers
– combination pliers
15.4.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 341
System board and components
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
15.4.3 Removing the UFM
Figure 220: Removing the UFM
Ê
Remove the nylon screw of the UFM (1).
Ê
Disconnect and remove the UFM (2).
342
Figure 221: Remaining UFM spacer
The UFM spacer remains on the system board.
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
V
CAUTION!
UFM contains customer information (e.g. IP address, License etc.). After replacing the UFM, you must pass the defective UFM to the customer, and ask for disposal. If the disposal of the defective UFM is requested by the customer, you break it according to the following procedure, and dispose it.
Figure 222: Tools for breaking the UFM
Figure 223: UFM breaking method
Ê
Use a long nose pliers and a combination pliers to break the UFM in half as shown in the figure.
15.4.4 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 343
System board and components
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
15.5 Removing the TPM
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Average task duration: 30 minutes
V
CAUTION!
Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with TPM backup copies. For security reasons, the TPM must be restored/resaved by the customer. After installing a new system board, the TPM must be enabled. You may not clear the TPM data.
If the contact persons DO NOT have a backup copy available, inform them that removing the TPM will cause to lose all data.
15.5.1 Required tools
●
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
Removing the system board:
– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
Removing the TPM:
– Thin slotted screw driver (2 x 0.4 mm)
For the Japanese market:
– Dedicated TPM screw driver (CWZ8291A)
344 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
15.5.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
Before removing the TPM board, it is necessary to remove BitLockerprotection from the computer and to decrypt the volume.
Ask the system administrator to turn off BitLocker-protection using the
BitLocker setup wizard available either from the Control Panel or Windows
Explorer:
Ê
Open Bitlocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking
Control Panel, clicking Security, and then clicking Bitlocker Drive
Encryption.
I
Administrator permission required If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.
Ê
To turn off BitLocker and decrypt the volume, click Turn Off BitLocker, and then click Decrypt the volume.
I
Decrypting the volume may be time-consuming. By decrypting the volume, all of the information stored on that computer is decrypted.
For further information on how to disable BitLocker drive encryption, please refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base.
Fujitsu service partners will find additional information (also available in Japanese) on the Fujitsu Extranet web pages.
Ê
Disable TPM in the system board BIOS. Proceed as follows:
Ê
Switch on or restart your server.
Ê
As soon as the startup screen appears, press the [F2] function key to enter the BIOS.
Ê
Select the Advanced menu.
Ê
Select the Trusted Computing submenu.
Ê
Set the TPM Support and TPM State settings to Disabled.
Ê
Save your changes and exit the BIOS.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 345
System board and components
I
For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the "System Board D3032 BIOS Setup Utilty" reference manual available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
or from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server.
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the defective system board" on page 361
15.5.3 Removing the TPM
Ê
Lay the system board on a soft, antistatic surface with its component side facing down.
Figure 224: Removing the TPM screw
Ê
Locate the slotted lower end of the TPM screw (1).
Ê
Carefully loosen the TPM screw using a thin slotted screw driver (e.g. watchmaker's screw driver) or the dedicated TPM screw driver (Japanese market) (2).
346 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
V
CAUTION!
Ensure to turn the screw clockwise in order to remove it!
Slowly and carefully increase the pressure on the screw until it begins to turn. The effort when loosing the screw should be as low as possible.
Otherwise the thin metal bar may break, rendering it impossible to loosen the screw.
Ê
Remove the TPM screw (3).
Ê
Remove the TPM on the upper side of the system board.
0
/
Figure 225: Removing the TPM spacer
Ê
Using a small pair of combination pliers, press together the hooks on the
TPM spacer (1, see close-up) and remove it from the system board (2).
I
If the TPM is to be replaced, the TPM spacer may remain on the system board.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 347
System board and components
15.5.4 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the new system board" on page 365
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
15.6 Replacing the UFM
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Additional task duration for uploading "Recovery CD" image:
5 minutes
Average task duration: 5 minutes
15.6.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps:
– Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver
– long nose pliers
– combination pliers
348 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
15.6.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the riser module 3" on page 62
15.6.3 Removing the defective UFM
Ê
Remove the UFM as described in section
"Removing the UFM" on page 342 .
15.6.4 Installing the new UFM
0
/
Figure 226: Removing the UFM spacer
Ê
Remove the nylon screw from the UFM (1).
Ê
Remove the UFM spacer (2).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 349
System board and components
Figure 227: Installing the UFM
Ê
Connect the UFM to the system board and the remaining UFM spacer (1).
Ê
Fasten the UFM to the UFM spacer with the nylon screw (2).
15.6.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the riser module 3" on page 66
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
350 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
15.6.6 Software configuration
The UFM delivery set includes the "Recovery Tool CD" to setup the ESXi configuration. Proceed as follows:
Ê
Switch on the server.
Ê
Right after switching on the server, insert the "Recovery Tool CD" into the
DVD drive and close the drive tray.
Ê
The server should now boot from the "Recovery Tool CD".
Ê
Follow the on-screen instructions.
15.7 Replacing the TPM
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Average task duration: 30 minutes
V
CAUTION!
Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with TPM backup copies. For security reasons, the TPM must be restored/resaved by the customer. After installing a new system board, the TPM must be enabled. You may not clear the TPM data.
If the contact persons DO NOT have a backup copy available, inform them that replacing the TPM board will cause to lose all data.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 351
System board and components
15.7.1 Required tools
●
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
Removing the system board:
– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
Replacing the TPM:
– Bit screw driver
– TPM bit insert (*)
– Thin slotted screw driver (2 x 0.4 mm) (*)
(*) For the Japanese market:
– Dedicated TPM screw driver (CWZ8291A)
– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)
15.7.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the defective system board" on page 361
15.7.3 Removing the defective TPM
Ê
Remove the TPM as described in section
"Removing the TPM" on page 344
.
Ê
Leave the TPM spacer on the system board when removing the defective
TPM.
352 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
15.7.4 Installing the new TPM
System board and components
Figure 228: TPM spacer
I
The TPM spacer is already present on the system board.
Ê
Install the TPM as described in section "Installing the TPM" on page 338 .
15.7.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
Reinstall the system board as described in section
"Installing the new system board" on page 365
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
I
You can find information on configuring the TPM in the "System Board
D3032 BIOS Setup Utility" reference manual.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 353
System board and components
15.8 Replacing the SCU key
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
Figure 229: Position SCU key
15.8.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less
15.8.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
354 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the air duct" on page 63
15.8.3 Removing the defective SCU key
Figure 230: Removing the SCU key
Ê
Pull the SCU key from the connector "SKU KEY" on the system board using the green touch point.
15.8.4 Installing the new SCU key
Figure 231: Installing the SCU key
Ê
Connect the SCU key to the connector "SKU KEY" on the system board.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 355
System board and components
15.8.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the air duct" on page 63
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
Ê
"Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 83
15.9 Replacing the lithium battery
Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)
Average task duration: 5 minutes
V
CAUTION!
The lithium battery must be replaced with an identical battery or with a battery type recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not throw lithium batteries into the trash can. They must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations on special waste.
Make sure you insert the lithium battery the right way round – the
positive pole must be on the housing side!
15.9.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less
Main steps: tool-less; recommended: tooth pick
356 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
15.9.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
15.9.3 Replacing the defective lithium battery
4
1
2
3
Figure 232: Replacing the lithium battery
Ê
Press the locking spring into direction of the arrow (1), so that the lithium battery jumps out of its socket.
Ê
Remove the battery (2).
V
CAUTION!
Sharp tools such as screw drivers might damage system board components in case of slipping.
If the battery cannot be ejected without the help of a tool, it is recommended to use a tooth pick.
Ê
Insert a new lithium battery of the same type into the socket (3) and (4).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 357
System board and components
15.9.4 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
Ê
"Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 83
Ê
"Verifying the system time settings" on page 90
15.10 Replacing the system board
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Additional task duration for OS and FW Flash: 10 minutes
Average task duration: 40 minutes
Note on system information backup / restore
I
The front panel board contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains system information like server name and model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.
To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID
EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored from the front panel board to the new system board.
V
CAUTION!
For that reason the front panel board and system board must not be replaced simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration data on the system board would fail.
358 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
Note on network settings recovery
I
When replacing network controllers or the system board, network configuration settings in the operating system will be lost and replaced by default values. This applies to all static IP address and LAN teaming configurations.
Ensure to note down your current network settings before replacing a network controller or the system board.
Note on TPM
I
The system board can be equipped with an optional TPM (Trusted
Platform Module). This module enables third party programs to store key information (e. g. drive encryption using Windows Bitlocker Drive
Encryption).
If the customer is using TPM functionality, the TPM has to be removed from the defective system board and connected to the new system
board. For a detailed description, please refer to section "Removing the
"Installing the TPM" on page 337
.
The TPM is activated in the system BIOS.
V
CAUTION!
– Before replacing the system board, ask the customer whether TPM functionality is used.
– If the customer is using TPM functionality, remove the TPM from the old system board and install it on the new system board.
Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with TPM backup copies. For security reasons, the TPM must be restored / resaved by the customer. After installing a new system board the TPM must be enabled. You may not clear the TPM data.
If the contact persons DO NOT have a backup copy available, inform them that replacing the TPM board will cause to lose all data.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 359
System board and components
15.10.1 Required tools
●
●
Preliminary and concluding steps: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver
Replacing the system board:
– Magnifying glass (for inspecting socket cover springs)
If a TPM is installed:
– Bit screw driver
– TPM bit insert (*)
– Thin slotted screw driver (2 x 0.4 mm) (*)
(*) For the Japanese market:
– Dedicated TPM screw driver (CWZ8291A)
– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)
If a UFM is installed:
– Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver
15.10.2 Preliminary steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Opening the rack door" on page 55
Ê
"Locating the defective server" on page 51
Ê
If applicable, ensure to note down your current network settings in the operating system.
Ê
"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 76
Ê
"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 75
Ê
"Shutting down the server" on page 55
Ê
Disconnect all external cables.
Ê
"Extending/removing the server from the rack" on page 56
Ê
"Opening the server" on page 59
Ê
"Removing the air duct" on page 63
360 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
Ê
Remove all memory modules, see section "Removing a memory module" on page 247 .
I
Before removing the memory modules, take a note on the installation slot number for each memory module. Make sure that you reinstall the memory modules in the slot they were located before the replacement.
Ê
Remove all heat sinks, see section
"Removing the heat sink" on page 265 .
Ê
Remove all expansion cards, see section
"Expansion cards and riser cards" on page 170 .
I
Before removing the expansion cards, take a note on the installation slot number for each card. Make sure that you reinstall the card in the slot it was located before the replacement.
Ê
"Removing the front LAN card" on page 303
(if applicable)
Ê
"Removing the UFM" on page 342
(if applicable)
I
Remove the UFM spacer from the defective system board and fasten it with the UFM screw to the UFM board.
Ê
"Removing the defective SCU key" on page 355
(if applicable)
Ê
Remove all fan modules, see section "Removing the defective fan module" on page 148 .
I
Check if all fan modules are uniquely identified so that you can reinsert them into their original bays.
15.10.3 Removing the defective system board
Ê
Disconnect all cables from the system board:
– Two power cables of power supply
– Front panel cable
– Power cable for HDD backplane
– SATA cables for HDD backplane (if applicable)
– SATA cable for ODD (if applicable)
– Front VGA cable (if applicable)
– OOB cable (if applicable)
For the cable plan see section "Cabling" on page 370 .
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 361
System board and components
Figure 233: Removing the fan cage
Ê
Remove the four screws (1).
Ê
Push the fan cage somewhat in direction of the arrow (2) to disengage the hooks (see close-up).
Ê
Remove the fan cage upward (3).
Figure 234: Removing the distance holder
Ê
Remove the distance holder from the system board (see circle).
362 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
Figure 235: Position of the screws
Ê
Remove the nine screws from the system board.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 363
System board and components
Figure 236: Removing the system board
Ê
Use both hands to lift the system board carefully out of the chassis in a slight angle. Thereby you pull the connectors out of the connector panel.
V
CAUTION!
Always take the system board with both hands!
Never lift the system board one-sided or at a heat sink, because the solder connections between the socket and the system board come under tension and increase the risk of damage and malfunction!
Don’t damage the EMI springs which are essential to comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements and fire protection measures.
Ê
Place the removed and the new system board on an antistatic surface.
Ê
Remove the TPM as described in section
"Removing the TPM" on page 344
.
364 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
Ê
Remove the processor as described in section
"Removing the defective processor" on page 266
.
Ê
Remove the protective plastic cover from the processor socket of the new system board and fit it onto the socket of the defective system board which will be sent back to spares.
I
Returned system boards without this cover probably have to be scrapped.
15.10.4 Installing the new system board
Ê
Install the processor as described in section
"Installing the new processor" on page 270 ).
Ê
Check the settings on the new system board (see section "Settings system board" on page 394 ).
Ê
Insert the system board by holding it at a slight angle. Slide the connectors into the connector panel (see figure
).
Ê
Lower the system board carefully into the chassis.
Ê
Adjust the system board. If necessary adjust the position of the system board with a gentle twisting motion.
I
When the system board is in the right position, the centre rings engage with the holes indicated.
Ê
Fasten the system board with the nine screws (see figure 235 on page 363 ).
Ê
Install the distance holder (see figure
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 365
System board and components
Figure 237: Installing the fan cage
Ê
Insert the fan cage (1).
Ê
Push the fan cage somewhat in direction of the arrow (2) to engage the hooks (see close-up).
Ê
Fasten fan cage with the four screws (3).
Ê
Reconnect all cables to the system board:
– Two power cables of power supply
– Front panel cable
– Power cable for HDD backplane
– SATA cables for HDD backplane (if applicable)
– SATA cable for ODD (if applicable)
– Front VGA cable (if applicable)
– OOB cable (if applicable)
For the cable plan see section
.
366 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
System board and components
15.10.5 Concluding steps
Perform the following procedures:
Ê
"Installing the new SCU key" on page 355
(if applicable)
Ê
"Installing the TPM" on page 337
(if applicable)
Ê
"Installing the UFM" on page 334
(if applicable)
Ê
Install all fan modules, see section "Installing the new fan module" on page 148 .
I
Make sure that you reinstall each fan module in the bay it was located before the replacement.
Ê
Install all memory modules, see section
"Installing a memory module" on page 244 .
I
Make sure that you reinstall each memory module in the slot it was located before the replacement.
Ê
Install all heat sinks, see section
"Installing the heat sink" on page 275
.
Ê
"Installing the front LAN card" on page 300
(if applicable)
Ê
Install all expansion cards see section "Expansion cards and riser cards" on page 170 .
I
Make sure that you reinstall each card in the slots it was located before the replacement.
Ê
"Installing the air duct" on page 63
Ê
"Closing the server" on page 67
Ê
"Installing the server in the rack" on page 69
Ê
Connect all external cables.
Ê
"Updating the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 81
Ê
If applicable, activate TPM functionality in the system BIOS under Security >
TPM (Security Chip) Setting > Security Chip. For more information, refer to the
"System Board D3032 BIOS Setup Utility" reference manual.
Ê
"Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 83
Ê
"Verifying the system time settings" on page 90
Ê
"Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses" on page 95
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 367
System board and components
Ê
"Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 92
Ê
"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 88
Ê
"Switching on the server" on page 73
Ê
"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 94
Ê
If applicable, reconfigure your network settings in the operation system according to the original configuration of the replaced controller (expansion card or onboard).
I
Configuration of network settings should be performed by the customer. For further information, please refer to section
"Note on network settings recovery" on page 359
Ê
If applicable, restore LAN teaming configurations as described in section
"After replacing the system board" on page 98
Ê
"Closing the rack door" on page 74
368 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
16 Cables
16.1 Overview cables
3
4
No. Part number
1 A3C40137879
2
5
6
A3C40137878 or
A3C40144322 (flat cable)
A3C40140463
A3C40143425
A3C40137880
A3C40137881
Description
Front I/O cable
Mini SAS
From - to
System board to front panel
System board to backplane or SAS controller to backplane
System board to backplane OOB cable
Mini SAS SAS controller to 8x backplane
System board to backplane HDD POWER
CABLE
SATA ODD CABLE System board and 4x BPL to ODD (cage)
7
8
T26139-Y3994-V101 VGA cable
T26139-Y3987-V2
T26139-Y3987-V3 iBBU cable
(550 mm)
System board to front VGA
iBBU to Wasat iBBU cable (16 cm) iBBU to RAID card D2616 9
10
11
T26139-Y4032-V3
T26139-Y4032-V2
FBU cable (17 cm) FBU to RAID card D3116
FBU cable (47 cm) FBU to Procyon-U controller
Com port System board to slot 12 S26361-F3120-V3
A3C40071727
13 T26139-Y4015-V101 NCSI cable System board to modular
LAN controller D2755
14 T26139-Y4025-V1 Front LAN Cable LAN module to front LAN
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 369
Cables
16.2 Cabling
PSU 1
PSU 2
P
D
B
1
Front panel
Figure 238: Basic cabling
PSU 1
PSU 2
P
D
B 14
1
7
Front panel
Front
VGA/LAN
Figure 239: Basic cabling + Front VGA/LAN
370 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
PSU 1
PSU 2
P
D
B
1
Front panel
2
3
5
6
ODD
Cables
Figure 240: Basic cabling + ODD + 4xHDD (onboard)
PSU 1
PSU 2
P
D
B
RAID card
D2616
1
Front panel
2
3
5
6
ODD
Figure 241: Basic cabling + ODD + 4xHDD + RAID card D2616
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 371
Cables
PSU 1
PSU 2
P
D
B
RAID card
D2616
9 iBBU
1
Front panel
2
3
5
6
ODD
Figure 242: Basic cabling + ODD + 4xHDD + RAID card D2616+ iBBU
PSU 1
PSU 2
P
D
B
RAID card
D2616
9 iBBU
1
Front panel
2
3
5
4
Figure 243: Basic cabling + 8xHDD + RAID card D2616 + iBBU
372 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
PSU 1
PSU 2
Wasat
P
D
B
RAID card
D2616
8 iBBU
1
Front panel
2
3
5
4
Cables
Figure 244: Basic cabling + 8xHDD + RAID card D2616 +Wasat + iBBU
PSU 1
PSU 2
P
D
B
RAID card
D3116
10 FBU
1
Front panel
2
3
5
4
Figure 245: Basic cabling + 8xHDD + RAID card D3116 + FBU
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 373
Cables
PSU 1
PSU 2
Procyon-U
P
D
B
RAID card
D3116
11 FBU
1
Front panel
2
3
5
4
Figure 246: Basic cabling + 8xHDD + RAID card D3116 + Procyon-U + FBU
PSU 1
PSU 2
P
D
B
RAID card
D3116
11 FBU
1
Front panel
2
3
5
4
Procyon-U
Figure 247: Basic cabling + Procyon-U in slot 2
374 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Cables
PSU 1
PSU 2
P
D
B
RAID card
D3116
11 FBU
1
Front panel
2
3
5
Procyon-U
12
-D2755
13
4
Figure 248: Basic cabling + ODD + 8xHDD + RAID card D3116 + Procyon-U + FBU + D2755
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 375
Cables
376 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
17 Appendix
17.1 Mechanical overview
17.1.1 Front side
Figure 249: Front side 4x 2.5-inch HDDs
4
5
Pos. Component
1
2
3
4x 2.5-inch hard disk drives / dummy modules
Front VGA/LAN module (option)
ID card
ODD (option) / dummy cover
Front panel and indicators
Figure 250: Front side 8x 2.5-inch HDDs
2
3
Pos. Component
1 8x 2.5-inch hard disk drives / dummy modules
4
Front VGA/LAN module
ID card
Front panel and indicators
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 377
Appendix
17.1.2 Rear side
Figure 251: Rear side
4
5
Pos. Component
1
2
3
Up to 2 power supply modules / dummy cover
PCIe slot 3
PCIe slot 2 (option)
PCIe slot 1
Connectors and indicators
I
PCIe slot 4 is located inside the housing.
378 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
17.1.3 Top view
Appendix
Figure 252: Top view 4x 2.5-inch HDDs
3
4
5
Pos. Component
1
2
Up to 2 power supply modules
Riser module 1
Riser module 2
Riser module 3
CPU 1
8
9
6
7
Main memory CPU 1
CPU 2
Main memory CPU 2
Fan modules
10 4x 2.5-inch hard disk drives / dummy modules
11 Top side: front VGA/LAN module (option)
Bottom side: ODD (option) / dummy cover
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 379
Appendix
Figure 253: Top view 8x 2.5-inch HDDs
6
7
4
5
Pos. Component
1
2
3
Up to 2 power supply modules
Riser module 1
Riser module 2
Riser module 3
CPU 1
Main memory CPU 1
CPU 2
8
9
Main memory CPU 2
Fan modules
10 8x 2.5-inch hard disk drives / dummy modules
11 Top side: front VGA/LAN module (option)
380 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Appendix
17.2 Connectors and indicators
17.2.1 System board
2 3 4 5
Shared
LAN
LAN 2
Management
LAN
LAN
CTRL
Slot riser card / slot 2 and 3 iRMC
VGA
Slot 3
Slot 2
Slot riser card / slot 1
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3 SERIAL 1 TPM
NC-SI
CPU 1 DIMM 1C
CPU 1 DIMM 2C
CPU 1 DIMM 3C
CPU 1 DIMM 1D
CPU 1 DIMM 2D
CPU 1 DIMM 3D
1
0
/
UFM
Front
VGA
1
1
CN101
J9
SKU Key
PWR 2
PCH
Slot riser card / slot 4
CPU 2 DIMM 1E
CPU 2 DIMM 2E
CPU 2 DIMM 3E
CPU 2 DIMM 1F
CPU 2 DIMM 2F
CPU 2 DIMM 3F
PWR 1
Front
Panel
SATA 1
SAS 1
BP
PWR
Front LAN M
SMB
SAS
FAN 11/12 SYS
7
6
8
9
:
CPU 2
FAN 9/10 SYS
FAN 7/8 SYS
;
<
CPU 1
CPU 1 DIMM 3B
CPU 1 DIMM 2B
CPU 1 DIMM 1B
CPU 1 DIMM 3A
CPU 1 DIMM 2A
CPU 1 DIMM 1A
FAN 5/6 SYS
CPU 2 DIMM 3H
CPU 2 DIMM 2H
CPU 2 DIMM 1H
CPU 2 DIMM 3G
CPU 2 DIMM 2G
CPU 2 DIMM 1G
INDICATE
CSS
Battery
FAN 3/4 SYS
FAN 1/2 SYS
=
>
?
B A A
Figure 254: Internal connectors of the system board D3032
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 381
Appendix
3
4
5
No. Print
1 SKU Key
2 FRONT VGA
UFM
PWR 2
PWR 1
Description
Connector for SCU key
Connector for optional front VGA
Connector for optional USB Flash Module (UFM)
I
2
C connector for PSU
Power supply connector 12V
8
9
6
7
Front Panel
SATA 1
Front panel connector
SATA HDD connector
FAN 11/12 SYS Power connector for system fans 11 and 12
SAS 1
10 BP PWR
SATA connector for optical drive
Power connector for SAS/SATA backplane
11 FRONT LAN M Connector for optional front LAN card
12 SAS SMB LED signaling connector for SAS/SATA backplane
13 FAN 9/10 SYS Power connector for system fans 9 and 10
14 FAN 7/8 SYS Power connector for system fans 7 and 8
15 FAN 5/6 SYS
16 FAN 3/4 SYS
17 FAN 1/2 SYS
18 NC-SI
19 TPM
20 SERIAL 1
Power connector for system fans 5 and 6
Power connector for system fans 3 and 4
Power connector for system fans 1 and 2
Connector for NCSI cable
Connector for optional TPM
Connector for optional serial interface
382 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Appendix
Shared
LAN
LAN 2
C
B
Management
LAN
A
VGA
LAN
CTRL
Slot riser card / slot 2 and 3 iRMC
I
NC-SI
F
Slot 3
Slot 2
F
F
Slot riser card / slot 1
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3 SERIAL 1 TPM
G
CPU 1 DIMM 1C
CPU 1 DIMM 2C
CPU 1 DIMM 3C
CPU 1 DIMM 1D
CPU 1 DIMM 2D
CPU 1 DIMM 3D
CPU 1
UFM
1
Front
VGA
H
1
CN101
J9
SKU Key
PWR 2
PWR 1
PCH
Slot riser card / slot 4
F
CPU 2 DIMM 1E
CPU 2 DIMM 2E
CPU 2 DIMM 3E
CPU 2 DIMM 1F
CPU 2 DIMM 2F
CPU 2 DIMM 3F
Front
Panel
SATA 1
FAN 11/12 SYS
K
SAS 1
BP
PWR
Front LAN M
SMB
SAS
CPU 1 DIMM 3B
CPU 1 DIMM 2B
CPU 1 DIMM 1B
CPU 1 DIMM 3A
CPU 1 DIMM 2A
CPU 1 DIMM 1A
H
H
FAN 9/10 SYS
K
CPU 2
K
FAN 7/8 SYS
G
FAN 5/6 SYS
CPU 2 DIMM 3H
CPU 2 DIMM 2H
CPU 2 DIMM 1H
CPU 2 DIMM 3G
CPU 2 DIMM 2G
CPU 2 DIMM 1G
INDICATE
CSS
Battery
L
FAN 3/4 SYS
FAN 1/2 SYS
K
K
K
H
Figure 255: Indicators on the system board and CSS indicate button
No.
Description
1 Indicate CSS button
LEDs A, B and C are visible from outside on the rear of the server. All the other
LEDs are only visible, if the cover of the server has been opened.
If the server has been powered off (power plugs disconnected) it is possible to indicate the failure states of fans, memory modules, controllers, battery and
CPU by pressing the indicate CSS button.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 383
Appendix
The LEDs have the following meaning:
LED Indicator
A - Identification blue on server is identified via the ServerView
Operations Manager blue flashing local monitor off
B - CSS
(Customer Self
Service) off yellow on
Meaning no error (CSS component) indicates a prefailure (CSS component) yellow flashing indicates a failure (CSS component)
C - GEL
(Global Error
LED)
F - Controller off orange on no error (non CSS component) indicates a prefailure (non CSS component) orange flashing indicates a failure of a non CSS component.
Reasons for a failure may be:
– over temperature measured by one of the sensors
– sensor is defective
– CPU error
– software detected an error off PCI card okay
G - CPU
H - Memory module
I - iRMC
K - Fans
L - Battery orange on off orange on off orange on
PCI card failure (PCI card installed on riser card)
CPU okay
CPU failure memory module running memory module failure off iRMC S3 inactive green flashing iRMC S3 okay off fan running orange on off orange on fan failure battery running battery failure
384 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Appendix
17.2.2 Connector panel
Figure 256: Connector panel
No. Description
1 Shared LAN connector (for WOL/PXE/iSCSI function)
2 Standard LAN connector
3 Management LAN connector (for iRMC S3 server management function)
4 Global error indicator (orange), CSS indicator (yellow), ID indicator
(blue); (description see preceding section)
5 Video connector (VGA)
6 3x USB connectors
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 385
Appendix
17.2.3 LAN connectors
Figure 257: LAN LEDs on the connector panel
LED Indicator
1 LAN speed
2 LAN link/transfer
Description
Steady yellow signal in the event of a LAN transfer rate of 1 Gbit/s
Steady green signal in the event of a LAN transfer rate of 100 Mbit/s.
Remains dark in the event of a LAN transfer rate of
10 Mbit/s.
Steady green signal when a LAN connection exists.
Remains dark when no LAN connection exists.
Flashes green when LAN transfer takes place.
386 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Appendix
17.2.4 Front panel
Figure 258: Controls and indicators on the front panel
1 HDD/SSD error indicator 9 Global Error indicator
2 PSU error indicator 10 HDD/SSD activity indicator
3 Temperature error indicator 11 Power-on indicator
4 CPU error indicator 12 On/Off button
5 Memory error indicator
6 Fan error indicator
7 ID indicator
8 CSS indicator
13 NMI button
14 Reset button
15 ID button
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 387
Appendix
17.2.4.1 Control elements
On/Off button
When the system is switched off, it can be switched on again by pressing the On/Off button.
When the system is operating, pressing the On/Off button will switch off the system.
V
CAUTION!
Risk of loss of data!
I
The On/Off button does not disconnect the server from the mains voltage. To disconnect from the mains completely, remove the power plug(s).
NMI NMI button
V
CAUTION!
Do not press! Risk of loss of data! The NMI button may only be used by service personnel.
RST Reset button
Pressing the reset button reboots the system.
V
CAUTION!
Risk of loss of data!
ID ID button
ID LED lights up (blue) on the front and on the rear of the server when the ID button is pressed. Both ID indicators are synchronized.
388 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Appendix
17.2.4.2 Indicators on the front panel
Power-on indicator (three colors)
Lights orange when the server is switched off but mains voltage is present.
Lights up yellow during power up delay.
I
If the server is switched off and then immediately switched on again, a server is only restarted after a power up delay.
This prevents a current overload, for example.
You can set the power up delay (in seconds) in the
BIOS-setup in the Server Menu menu with Power Cycle Delay.
Lights up green when the server is switched ON.
Flashes green if the server has been switched on and is in standby mode or if the server is in a sleep state.
Hard disk activity indicator (green)
Flashes green when an internal hard disk drive is being accessed.
!
Global Error indicator (orange)
– Lights up orange if a prefailure event has been detected that requires (precautionary) service intervention.
– Flashes orange if an error was detected that requires service intervention.
– Does not light up if there is no critical event.
If the event is still acute after a power failure, the indicator is activated after the restart.
The indicator also lights up in standby mode.
You can find more details on the indicated errors in the System
Event Log (SEL), in the ServerView Operations Manager or via the iRMC S3's Web interface.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 389
Appendix
CSS
ID
CSS indicator (yellow)
– Lights up yellow if a prefailure event was detected for a CSS component that you can fix yourself (for reasons of precaution) with the CSS concept.
– Flashes yellow if an error was detected that you can fix yourself with the CSS concept.
– Does not light up when the system is OK.
If the event is still acute after a power failure, the indicator is activated after the restart.
The indicator also lights up in standby mode.
ID indicator (blue)
Lights up blue when the system has been selected by pressing the ID button. To deactivate, press the button again.
The ID indicator can also be activated via the ServerView
Operations Manager and the iRMC S3 Web interface and its status reported to the ServerView Operations Manager and the iRMC S3.
17.2.5 Optical drives
Figure 259: Indicator on optical drive
Optical drive activity indicator
Lights up green when the storage medium is being accessed.
390 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
17.2.6 HDD/SSD modules
Hard disk drive indicators
Appendix
햲 햳
Figure 260: Indicators on the 2.5-inch HDD module
1 HDD BUSY (green)
– Lights up: HDD in active phase
– Does not light: HDD inactive (drive inactive)
2 HDD FAULT (orange)
(in conjunction with a RAID controller)
– Does not light: no HDD error
– Lights up: HDD Faulty or Rebuild Stopped (drive defective, needs replacing, a rebuild process was stopped or the HDD module is not correctly inserted)
– Slow flashing: HDD Rebuild (the data is being restored after changing a drive)
– Fast flashing: HDD Identify
– Four fast blinks/pause: HDD Predicted Fault
– Two fast flashes/pause: HDD Hot Spare (Hot spare drive active. The corresponding drive has failed).
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 391
Appendix
Solid state disk indicators
Figure 261: Indicators on the SSD modules
1 LED green
BUSY
2 LED orange
– Lights up: SSD in active phase
– Does not light: SSD inactive (drive inactive)
FAULT (orange)
(in conjunction with a RAID controller)
– Does not light: no error
– Lights up: Faulty or Rebuild Stopped (drive defective/needs replacing, a rebuild process was stopped or the module is not correctly inserted)
– Slow flashing: Rebuild (the data is being restored after changing a drive)
– Fast flashing: Identify
392 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
17.2.7 Power supply modules
Appendix
0
Figure 262: Indicator on the power supply module
1 Indicator on the hot-plug power supply module (two colors)
800 W power supply module:
Flashes green when the server is switched off, but mains voltage is present (standby mode).
Lights up green when the server is switched on and functioning properly.
Flashes orange when a predictable error has been detected, but the power supply unit is still running.
Lights up orange if no mains voltage is present or the power supply unit has failed.
450 W power supply module:
Flashes green when the server is switched off, but mains voltage is present (standby mode).
Lights up green when the server is switched on and functioning properly.
Lights up orange in case of OCP/OVP or when the fan of the power supply unit has failed.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 393
Appendix
17.3 Settings system board
17.3.1 Jumper
UFM
Front
VGA
1
1
CN101
J9
SKU Key
PWR 2
PWR 1
PCH
Slot riser card / slot 4
CPU 2 DIMM 1E
CPU 2 DIMM 2E
CPU 2 DIMM 3E
CPU 2 DIMM 1F
CPU 2 DIMM 2F
CPU 2 DIMM 3F
Front
Panel
SATA 1
FAN 11/12 SYS
SAS 1
BP
PWR
Front LAN M
SMB
SAS
Shared
LAN
LAN 2
Management
LAN
LAN
CTRL
Slot riser card / slot 2 and 3 iRMC
VGA
Slot 3
Slot 2
Slot riser card / slot 1
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3 SERIAL 1 TPM
NC-SI
CPU 1 DIMM 1C
CPU 1 DIMM 2C
CPU 1 DIMM 3C
CPU 1 DIMM 1D
CPU 1 DIMM 2D
CPU 1 DIMM 3D
CPU 1
CPU 2
CPU 1 DIMM 3B
CPU 1 DIMM 2B
CPU 1 DIMM 1B
CPU 1 DIMM 3A
CPU 1 DIMM 2A
CPU 1 DIMM 1A
Jumper settings
Jumper Description
CN101
Password Skip/
Recovery BIOS
J9 CMOS Clear
Setting
1
Default
1
Default
Password Skip
1 enabled
Clear CMOS
Recovery BIOS
1 enabled
FAN 7/8 SYS
FAN 9/10 SYS
FAN 5/6 SYS
CPU 2 DIMM 3H
CPU 2 DIMM 2H
CPU 2 DIMM 1H
CPU 2 DIMM 3G
CPU 2 DIMM 2G
CPU 2 DIMM 1G
INDICATE
CSS
Battery
FAN 3/4 SYS
FAN 1/2 SYS
Figure 263: Jumper
394 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Appendix
17.4 Minimum startup configuration
Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
If the server does not start up or other problems occur, it may be necessary to take the system down to its most basic configuration in order to isolate the defective component.
The minimum startup configuration consists of the following components and cables:
Component
System board
CPU with CPU heat sink
1 memory module
Front panel module
Power supply unit
Notes no TPM, UFM or expansion cards installed installed in socket CPU 1 installed in slot DIMM 1A installed in bay 1
Table 6: Minimum startup configuration - components
Cable
Front panel cable
Power cable
Notes
Table 7: Minimum startup configuration - cables
Ê
Shut down the server as described in section
"Shutting down the server" on page 55 .
Ê
Remove the power cord from the cable clamp and disconnect it from the system.
Ê
Take the system down to its minimum startup configuration.
Ê
Reconnect the power cord to the power supply unit and secure it with a cable clamp.
Ê
Connect a keyboard, mouse and display to the server.
RX200 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 395
Appendix
Ê
Switch on the server as described in section
"Switching on the server" on page 73
.
V
CAUTION!
Since the fan module is not included in the minimum startup configuration, the server must be shut down immediately after the diagnostic process is complete (POST phase has been passed).
The minimum startup configuration must be used exclusively for diagnostic purposes by maintenance personnel, never in daily operation!
396 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200
Letöltés
Hirdetés